AMP READING SYSTEM LEVEL I
Correlated to: GEORGIA PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
Language Arts
Grade 6-8
Copyright © 2008 Pearson Education, Inc. or its affiliate(s). All rights reserved.
Grade 6 Page 2 of 60
CORRELATION TO THE GEORGIA PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
Subject Area: Language Arts State-Funded Course: Language Arts/Grade 6 Textbook Title: AMP Reading System, Level I (Orange) Publisher: Pearson ________________________________________________________
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
ELA6R1 Reading and Literature The student demonstrates comprehension and shows evidence of a warranted and responsible explanation of a variety of literary and informational texts.
Direct and intensive teaching of comprehension strategies, one strategy at a time, is the foundation of AMP Reading. Each strategy is taught, practiced, and applied in the course of a unit, and comprehension monitoring is taught with each strategy. See: TE I: pp. T14-17, T20 Unit I: Summarizing; Unit 2: Questioning; Unit 3: Predicting TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure; Unit 5: Visualizing; Unit 6: Inferencing; Unit 7: Metacognition Student Guide: Multiple comprehension strategies are used throughout, including previewing, problem/solution analysis, analyzing sequence, Summarizing, comparing and contrasting, understanding cause and effect, using text clues, using picture clues, likening to personal experience, using inferences, making predictions, and so forth. Lessons begin with an activity that includes an explanation of the strategy and how it helps students become better readers. There is an illustration or passage used to demonstrate the strategy and immediate opportunity for student response in the margin. After the initial activity, further question/response reading comprehension activities are included for additional reinforcement. See the following examples: SG I: Unit I, Sports on the Edge pp. 5-7, 10-13, 16-19 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 46- 49, 52-55 SG II: Unit 4, Staying Alive pp. 4-7, 10-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 46-49, 52-55 Assessment Masters: Assessment of student comprehension is continuous and ongoing. Each unit includes a Mid-Unit Assessment and an End-of-Unit Assessment. See examples on pages 13-17, 21-25, 29-33, 37-41 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, and Math: pp. 13-16, 28-31
Grade 6 Page 3 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
For literary texts, the student identifies the characteristics of various genres and produces evidence of reading that:
a. Identifies and analyzes sensory details and figurative language.
SG II: pp. 67-68, 72-75, 78, 109, 207-208 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67-68, 72-75, 78, 109; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp 207-208 Assessment Masters: pp. 80, 81, 88, 89, 90, 120, 122
b. Identifies and analyzes the author’s use of dialogue and description.
SG I: p. 80, 136 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, p. 80; Unit 3: Predicting, p. 136 SG II: pp. 5, 7, 11, 23-25, 67-69, 75, 109, 200, 208 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5, 7, 11, 23-25; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67-69, 75, 109; Unit 7: Metacognition: pp. 200, 208 Assessment Masters: pp. 32, 40, 80, 81, 88, 89, 120
c. Relates a literary work to historical events of the period.
SG I: pp. 80-81, 94-95, 103-104 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 80-81, 94-95, 103-104 SG II: pp. 150-151 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 150-151 Assessment Masters: pp. 29-33, 101-106
d. Applies knowledge of the concept that theme refers to the message about life and the world that the author wants us to understand whether implied or stated.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 56, 65 Assessment Masters: p. 25, 88
e. Identifies and analyzes the elements of setting, characterization, plot, and the resolution of the conflict of a story or play:
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. internal/external conflicts SG I: pp. 80-81, 95, 103-104, 136 TE I: pp. Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 80, 95; Unit 3: Predicting, p.136
Grade 6 Page 4 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
ii. character conflicts, characters vs. nature, characters vs. society
SG II: pp. 12, 62-63, 66, 68-69, 108, 136 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 62-63, 66, 68-69, 108; Unit 6: Inferencing, p.108
iii. antagonist/protagonist. Assessment Masters: pp. 77-81, 101-105
f. Identifies the speaker and recognizes the difference between first- and third-person narration.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Defines and explains how tone is conveyed in literature through word choice, sentence structure, punctuation, rhythm, repetition, and rhyme.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Responds to and explains the effects of sound, figurative language, and graphics in order to uncover meaning in literature:
i. Sound (e.g., alliteration, onomatopoeia, rhyme scheme)
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ii. Figurative language (i.e., simile, metaphor, hyperbole, personification)
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
iii. Graphics (i.e., capital letters, line length, bold face print, italics).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Compares traditional literature and mythology from different cultures.
Assessment Masters: pp. 53-56
j. Identifies and analyzes similarities and differences in mythologies from different cultures.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 6 Page 5 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
For informational texts, the student reads and comprehends in order to develop understanding and expertise and produces evidence of reading that:
a. Applies knowledge of common textual features (e.g., paragraphs, topic sentences, concluding sentences, glossary, index).
Examples: SG I: pp. 5, 11, 32, 33, 42, 47-49, 54; Glossary pp. 169-172 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 5, 11, 32, 33, 42, 47-49, 54 SG II: pp. 5, 111, 173, 178, 181, 185-186, 191, 193; Glossary pp. 225-229 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, p. 5; Unit 5: Visualizing, p. 111; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 173, 178, 181, 185-186, 191, 193 Assessment Masters: pp. 14-17, 21-25, 61-65, 69-73, 117-119 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45; Math, pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45
b. Applies knowledge of common graphic features (i.e., graphic organizers, diagrams, captions, illustrations, charts, tables, graphs).
Examples: SG I: pp. 32-33, 41-43, 46, 53, 117, 123-124, 129, 135, 138, 165 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 32-33, 41-43, 46, 53; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117, 123-124, 135, 138, 165; Blackline Masters, pp. 179, 181, 183 SG II: pp. 5-6, 26-27, 94, 97, 103-105, 109-110, 195, 200, 202, 205-207 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5-6, 26-27; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 94, 97, 103-105, 109-110; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117, 123-124, 135, 138, 165; Blackline Masters, pp. 231-243 Assessment Masters: pp. 47, 55, 63, 72-74, 80, 87-88, 121 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 31, 46-48; Math pp. 30, 41-43
c. Applies knowledge of common organizational structures and patterns (e.g., transitions, logical order, cause and effect, classification schemes).
Examples: SG II: pp. 26-28, 31, 41-43, 46-49, 52, 82-85, 88, 99 102-103, 108-109, 158, 165, 200, 206-208 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 26-28, 31, 41-43, 46-49, 52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 82-85, 88, 99, 102-103, 108-109; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 158, 165; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 200, 206-208; Blackline Masters, pp. 234-237 Assessment Masters: pp. 63-65, 71-74, 87
Grade 6 Page 6 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
d. Identifies and analyzes main ideas, supporting ideas, and supporting details.
While activities supporting this standard are found throughout the AMP Reading System, identifying and analyzing main ideas, supporting ideas, and supporting details is the particular focus of Unit 1: Summarizing. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 4-7, 10-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 46-50, 52-56 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 4-7, 10-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 46-50, 52-56 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26, 32, 65 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math, pp. 13-16
e. Follows multi-step instructions to complete or create a simple product.
TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-168D
The student understands and acquires new vocabulary and uses it correctly in reading and writing. The student
ELA6R2
a. Determines the meaning of unfamiliar words by using word, sentence, and paragraph clues.
SG I: pp. 27-28, 62-63, 106-107, 132, 139, 147. See also Vocabulary exercises throughout. Examples on pp. 2-3, 14-15, 20-21, 29-30 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 27-28; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 62-63, 106; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 132, 139, 147 SG II: pp. 64, 132, 154-155, 176, 188. See also Vocabulary exercises throughout. Examples on pp. 14-15, 29-30, 43-44, 58-59 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, p. 64-65; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 132, 154-155; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 176, 188 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary Assessments throughout. Examples on pp. 11- 12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 43-44, 51-52 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp 8-10
Grade 6 Page 7 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
b. Uses knowledge of Greek and Latin affixes to understand unfamiliar vocabulary.
SG I: pp. 8-9, 35-36, 76-77, 91-92, 162-163 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 8-9, 35-36; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 162-163 SG II: pp. 8-9, 35-36, 64-65, 76-77, 91-92 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-9, 35-36; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65, 76-77, 91-92 Assessment Masters: Examples on pp. 43, 51-52, 68 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: p. 10
c. Identifies and interprets words with multiple meanings.
SG II: pp. 20-21, 132-133 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 20-21; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 132-133
d. Uses reference skills to determine pronunciations, meanings, alternate word choices, and parts of speech of words.
SG I: pp. 20, 50, 62-63, 76, 108, 139 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 20, 50; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 62-63, 76, 108; Unit 3: Predicting, p. 139 SG II: pp. 10, 40, 60, 93, 95, 105, 147, 154-155, 187, 195-196 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 10, 40; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 60, 93, 105; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 147, 154-155; Unit 7: Metacognition, p187,195-196 Assessment masters: Examples on pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 43-44, 51-52, 59-60
The student reads aloud, accurately (in the range of 95%), familiar material in a variety of genres, in a way that makes meaning clear to listeners. The student
ELA6R3
a. Uses letter-sound knowledge to decode written English and uses a range of cueing systems (e.g., phonics and context clues) to determine pronunciation and meaning.
SG I: pp. 62-63, 106-107, 132-133, 147-148 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 62-63, 106-107; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 132-133, 147-148 SG II: pp. 35-36, 44-45, 58-59, 176-177 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 35-36, 44-45; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 58-59; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 176-177 Assessment Masters: pp. 19-20, 28, 35, 43, 51-52, 59-60
Grade 6 Page 8 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
b. Uses self-correction when subsequent reading indicates an earlier miscue (self-monitoring and self-correcting strategies).
Students complete multiple activities dealing with any given reading, allowing them to revisit the reading material and clarify their analysis. In particular, predicting and inferencing activities encourage students to skim or quickly read passages, make predictions or analyze the reading, then reread for accuracy. See: SG I: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 134-140, 143-146, 149-151, 153-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 134-140, 143-146, 149-151, 153-155, 159-161, 165-167 SG II: pp. 117-119, 122-125, 128-131, 134-140, 143-146, 149-155, 158-161, 165-167 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 122-125, 128-131, 134-140, 143-146, 149-155, 158-161, 165-167 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 93-97
c. Reads with a rhythm, flow, and meter that sounds like everyday speech (prosody).
Explicit instruction in oral reading fluency to improve reading achievement is included throughout the AMP program. See for example, instruction on: • Natural breaks (SG I: p. 137) • Relaxed reading (SG I: pp. 54, 81, 128, 146, 149, 164, 167) • Breathing (SG II: pp. 18, 90, 128, 137, 220) • Pace (SG I: pp. 48-49, 52, 55, 104-105, 145; SG II: pp. 24, 48, 98, 166- 167, 207, 214, 216-217, 220, 222-223) Students reread, in pairs or in groups, each of the passages in the Student Guides and are guided to carry out their daily independent reading fluently. Through teacher modeling, direct instruction, and tips, students focus on each of the aspects of fluency in each Student Guide unit. A Fluency tip appears with each passage in the Student Guide and is elaborated on in the Teacher’s Edition with suggestions for instruction, modeling, and practice. In addition, with the AMP Reading Online Library, students can repeatedly hear and read along with models of fluent reading.
Grade 6 Page 9 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
ELA6RC1 Reading Across the Curriculum The student reads a minimum of 25 grade-level appropriate books or book equivalents (approximately 1,000,000 words) per year from a variety of subject disciplines. The student reads both informational and fictional texts in a variety of genres and modes of discourse, including technical texts related to various subject areas.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books that correspond to the seven Student Guide units. Each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. Eighty-five percent of the selections are nonfiction. AMP Reading System Level I includes the following: • “Sports on the Edge” (sports, biography) • “Colossal Constructions” (physics, engineering, history) • “Unsolved Mysteries” (history, geography) • “Staying Alive” (history, environmental science) • “Strange Journeys” (science fiction, social studies, science) • “Nature in the Extreme” (geology, history, environmental science) • “Success Stories” (biography, history, earth science, archaeology, medicine, technology) In addition, Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
The student participates in discussions related to curricular learning in all subject areas. The student
ELA6RC2
a. Identifies messages and themes from books in all subject areas.
SG I: pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22-26, 28, 31-34, 37, 39-41, 47-49, 52, 54-55 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22-26, 28, 31-34, 37, 39-41, 47-49, 52, 55-54 SG II: pp. 179, 181 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 179, 181 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 13-16
Grade 6 Page 10 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
b. Responds to a variety of texts in multiple modes of discourse.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books, and each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. AMP Reading System Level I includes the following: • “Sports on the Edge” (sports, biography) • “Colossal Constructions” (physics, engineering, history) • “Unsolved Mysteries” (history, geography) • “Staying Alive” (history, environmental science) • “Strange Journeys” (science fiction, social studies, science) • “Nature in the Extreme” (geology, history, environmental science) • “Success Stories” (biography, history, earth science, archaeology, medicine, technology) Students respond to these texts by summarizing, questioning, predicting, analyzing structure, visualizing, inferencing, and applying Metacognition skills. In addition, Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
c. Relates messages and themes from one subject area to those in another area.
In several units, students relate information from their own experience to the subject of the text they are reading to enhance their understanding of messages and themes. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 97, 123-124, 129, 135, 165 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, p. 97; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 123-124, 129, 135, 165 SG I: pp. 117-119, 122-125, 128-131, 134, 137, 140, 143, 165-167 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 122-125, 128-131, 134, 137, 140, 143, 165-167 Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts also aid students in relating readings to social studies, science, and math.
d. Evaluates the merits of texts in every subject discipline.
Students assess the merits and relevance of a wide range of texts and apply ideas from them in “After You Read” prompts throughout. See examples: SG I: pp. 34, 37, 40, 43, 46, 49, 52, 55, 60, 63, 72 SG II: pp. 10, 13, 25, 31, 34, 40, 43, 49, 55, 63, 69
Grade 6 Page 11 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
e. Examines the author’s purpose in writing. Examples: SG I: pp. 26-27, 138-139, 154 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 26-27; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 138-139, 154 SG II: pp. 5, 11, 17, 23, 32, 38, 173, 185, 200 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5, 11, 17, 23, 32, 38; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 173, 185, 200 Assessment Masters: pp. 61-65, 69-73, 109-113, 117-121 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 27-31
f. Recognizes and uses the features of disciplinary texts (e.g., charts, graphs, photos, maps, highlighted vocabulary).
Examples: SG I: pp. 82, 117, 135, 138 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 82; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117, 135, 138 SG II: pp. 5-6, 60-63, 66, 72, 104, 207-208 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5-6; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 60-63, 66, 72, 104; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 207-208 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp.32-36
The student acquires new vocabulary in each content area and uses it correctly. The student
ELA6RC3
a. Demonstrates an understanding of contextual vocabulary in various subjects.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level I. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary words analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11, 19, 27, 35, 43, 51, 59, 67, 75, 83, 91, 99, 107, 115
Grade 6 Page 12 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
b. Uses content vocabulary in writing and speaking.
In vocabulary lessons throughout, students write their own sentences using or responding to vocabulary words. See examples: SG I: pp. 51, 59, 65, 71, 76, 77, 86, 106, 107 SG II: pp. 29, 35, 51, 58, 59, 70, 71, 76, 77 Additionally, teaching tips in the TE encourage teachers to have students collaborate on ideas for writing sentences and to volunteer and discuss their sentences. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 3, 9, 21, 30, 45 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 3, 9, 21, 30, 45
c. Explores understanding of new words found in subject area texts.
SG I/II: Vocabulary exercises throughout the Student Guides focus on words that are found in the subject area reading assignments. In addition to previously noted strategies, students also explore synonyms and antonyms, how prefixes and suffixes change a base word, parts of speech, analogies, shades of meaning, word families, word origins, idioms, connotation and denotation, and so on. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78, 106-109 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52; Unit II: Questioning, pp. 64- 66, 76-78, 106-109 SG II: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-66, 76-78 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10
The student establishes a context for information acquired by reading across subject areas. The student
ELA6RC4
a. Explores life experiences related to subject area content.
“After You Read” and “Beyond the Text” questions help students relate personal life experiences to the subject area content. See examples: SG I: pp. 4, 13, 43, 46, 86, 97, 99 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 4, 13, 43, 46; Unit II: Questioning: pp.86, 97, 99 SG II: pp. 16, 37, 52, 60, 116, 143 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 16, 37, 52, 60; Unit 6:Inferencing, pp116, 143
Grade 6 Page 13 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
b. Discusses in both writing and speaking how certain words and concepts relate to multiple subjects.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Determines strategies for finding content and contextual meaning for unfamiliar words or concepts.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level I. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary words analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11, 19, 27, 35, 43, 51, 59, 67, 75, 83, 91, 99, 107, 115
Writing The student produces writing that establishes an appropriate organizational structure, sets a context and engages the reader, maintains a coherent focus throughout, and provides a satisfying closure. The student
a. Selects a focus, an organizational structure, and a point of view based on purpose, genre expectations, audience, length, and format requirements.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
b. Writes texts of a length appropriate to address the topic or tell the story.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
ELA6W1
c. Uses traditional structures for conveying information (e.g., chronological order, cause and effect, similarity and difference, and posing and answering a question).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
Grade 6 Page 14 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
d. Uses appropriate structures to ensure coherence (e.g., transition elements).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
The student demonstrates competence in a variety of genres.
The student produces a narrative (fictional, personal) that:
a. Engages readers by establishing and developing a plot, setting, and point of view that are appropriate to the story (e.g., varied beginnings, standard plot line, cohesive devices).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G
b. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Includes sensory details and concrete language to develop plot, setting, and character (e.g., vivid verbs, descriptive adjectives, and varied sentence structures).
The use of sensory words in covered in: SG II, pp. 67-68, 72-75, 78, 109, 207-208 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67-68, 72-75, 78, 109; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 207-208
d. Uses a range of strategies (e.g., suspense, figurative language, dialogue, expanded vocabulary, movement, gestures, expressions).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Excludes extraneous details and inconsistencies. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA6W2
f. Provides a sense of closure appropriate to the writing.
TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168F; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 229
Grade 6 Page 15 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
The student produces writing (multi-paragraph expository composition such as description, explanation, comparison and contrast, or problem and solution) that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Establishes a statement as the main idea or topic sentence.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Develops a controlling idea that conveys a perspective on the subject.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
d. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
e. Develops the topic with supporting details. TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
f. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226
g. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
h. Concludes with a detailed summary linked to the purpose of the composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
Grade 6 Page 16 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
The student produces technical writing (friendly letters, thank-you notes, formula poems, instructions) that:
a. Creates or follows an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Applies rules of Standard English. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a response to literature that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Demonstrates an understanding of the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Advances a judgment that is interpretive, analytic, evaluative, or reflective.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Organizes an interpretation around several clear ideas, premises, or images.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Supports a judgment through references to the text.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 6 Page 17 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
f. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a multi-paragraph persuasive essay that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. States a clear position of a proposition or proposal.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Supports the position with organized and relevant evidence.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Excludes information and arguments that are irrelevant.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to a specific purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Anticipates and addresses readers’ concerns and counter-arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student uses research and technology to support writing. The student
ELA6W3
a. Uses organizational features of electronic text (e.g., bulletin boards, databases, keyword searches, e-mail addresses) to locate relevant information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 6 Page 18 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
b. Includes researched information in different types of products (e.g., compositions, multimedia presentations, graphic organizers, projects, etc.).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Cites references. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student consistently uses the writing process to develop, revise, and evaluate writing. The student
a. Plans and drafts independently and resourcefully.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112CF; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Revises manuscripts to improve the organization and consistency of ideas within and between paragraphs.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
ELA6W4
c. Edits to correct errors in spelling, punctuation, etc.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Conventions The student demonstrates understanding and control of the rules of the English language, realizing that usage involves the appropriate application of conventions and grammar in both written and spoken formats. The student
ELA6C1
a. Identifies and uses the eight basic parts of speech and demonstrates that words can be different parts of speech within a sentence.
i. Identifies and uses nouns – abstract, common, collective, plural, and possessive.
SG I: pp. 50, 76 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, p. 50; Unit 2: Questioning, p. 76
Grade 6 Page 19 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
ii. Identifies and uses pronouns – personal, possessive, interrogative, demonstrative, reflexive, and indefinite.
iii. Identifies and uses adjectives – common, proper, and demonstrative.
iv. Identifies and uses verbs – action (transitive/intransitive), linking, and state-of-being.
v. Identifies and uses verb phrases – main verbs and helping verbs.
vi. Identifies and uses adverbs.
vii. Identifies and uses prepositional phrases (preposition, object of the preposition, and any of its modifiers).
viii. Identifies and uses conjunctions – coordinating, correlative, and common subordinating.
ix. Identifies and uses interjections.
SG I: p. 76 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, p. 76 SG I: pp. 50, 76 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, p. 50; Unit 2: Questioning, p. 76 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 112E-G TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56E-F; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 172-174 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
b. Recognizes basic parts of a sentence (subject, verb, direct object, indirect object, predicate noun, predicate adjective).
TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 56C-F; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
c. Identifies and writes simple, compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences, avoiding fragments and run-ons.
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56C-E; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-172 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
d. Demonstrates appropriate comma and semicolon usage (compound and complex sentences, appositives, words in direct address).
TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 172-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
Grade 6 Page 20 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
e. Uses common spelling rules, applies common spelling patterns, and develops and masters words that are commonly misspelled.
Spelling rules are built in to vocabulary worksheets, particularly those that focus on affixes and homophones. See examples: SG I: pp. 8-9, 35-36, 76-77, 162-163 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 8-9, 35-36; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 76-77; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 162-163 SG II: pp. 76-77 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 76-77
f. Produces final drafts that demonstrate accurate spelling and the correct use of punctuation and capitalization.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Listening/Speaking/Viewing The student participates in student-to-teacher, student-to-student, and group verbal interactions. The student
a. Initiates new topics in addition to responding to adult-initiated topics.
Many oral language activities throughout TE I/II encourage student-initiated topics, particularly “After Students Read” sections. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 13, 40, 43, 52 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 7, 13, 15, 19
b. Asks relevant questions. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Responds to questions with appropriate information.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 58, 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71
d. Confirms understanding by paraphrasing the adult’s directions or suggestions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA6LSV1
e. Displays appropriate turn-taking behaviors. Students take turns with partners or in small groups to read aloud, analyze, discuss, etc. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 115, 118, 121, 124, 127, 130, 136, 137, 139, 142
Grade 6 Page 21 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
f. Actively solicits another person’s comments or opinions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Offers own opinion forcefully without being domineering.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Responds appropriately to comments and questions.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 58, 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71
i. Volunteers contributions and responds when directly solicited by teacher or discussion leader.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 58, 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71
j. Gives reasons in support of opinions expressed. Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 125, 129, 135, 151, 153, 166 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117, 121, 127, 135, 145
k. Clarifies, illustrates, or expands on a response when asked to do so.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 67, 82, 97 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 171, 190, 202, 217
l. Employs a group decision-making technique such as brainstorming or a problem-solving sequence (e.g., recognizes problem, defines problem, identifies possible solutions, selects optimal solution, implements solution, evaluates solution).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
m. Writes a response to/reflection of interactions with others.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA6LSV2 The student listens to and views various forms of text and media in order to gather and share information, persuade others, and express and
Grade 6 Page 22 of 60
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
understand ideas. The student will select and critically analyze messages using rubrics as assessment tools.
When responding to visual and oral texts and media (e.g., television, radio, film productions, and electronic media), the student:
a. Identifies persuasive and propaganda techniques used in media and identifies false and misleading information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Identifies the tone, mood, and emotion conveyed in the oral communication.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
When delivering or responding to presentations, the student:
a. Gives oral presentations or dramatic interpretations for various purposes.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Shows appropriate changes in delivery (e.g., gestures, vocabulary, pace, visuals).
SG I: pp. 10, 37, 39-40, 42-43, 49, 85, 99, 104, 108 TE I: Unit 1, pp. 10, 37, 39-40, 42-43, 49; Unit 2, Questioning, pp. 85, 99, 104, 1008 SG II: pp. 6, 7, 10, 19, 28, 33, 34, 42, 43, 54, 105, 108, 111, 134, 137 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 6, 7, 10, 19, 28, 33, 34, 42, 43, 54; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 105, 108, 111; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 134, 137
c. Uses language for dramatic effect. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Uses rubrics as assessment tools. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Uses electronic media for presentations. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 23 of 60
CORRELATION TO THE GEORGIA PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
Subject Area: Language Arts State-Funded Course: Language Arts/Grade 7 Textbook Title: AMP Reading System, Level I (Orange) Publisher: Pearson Education
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
Reading and Literature
ELA7R1 The student demonstrates comprehension and shows evidence of a warranted and responsible explanation of a variety of literary and informational texts.
For literary texts, the student identifies the characteristics of various genres and produces evidence of reading that:
a. Distinguishes between the concepts of theme in a literary work and the author’s purpose in an expository text.
Throughout the AMP program, students preview, discuss, and review author purpose and theme. See examples: SG I: pp. 5, 11, 13, 17, 23, 26, 32 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 5, 11, 13, 17, 23, 26, 32 SG II: pp. 5, 11, 17, 18, 22, 23, 26 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5, 11, 17, 18, 22, 23, 26 Assessment Masters: pp. 21-25, 69-73
b. Interprets a character’s traits, emotions, or motivations and gives supporting evidence from a text.
SG II: pp. 135-136 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 135-136 Assessment Masters: pp. 101-105
Grade 7 Page 24 of 60
c. Relates a literary work to information about its setting or historical moment.
SG I: pp. 80-81, 94-95, 103-104 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 80-81, 94-95, 103-104 SG II: pp. 62-63, 66, 68, 150-151 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 62-63, 66, 68; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 150-151 Assessment Masters, pp. 29-33, 77-80, 101-105
d. Analyzes recurring and similar themes across a variety of selections, distinguishing theme from topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Identifies events that advance the plot and determines how each event explains past or present action(s) or foreshadows future action(s).
SG I: pp. 135-136 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 135-136 SG II: pp. 61-63, 66, 68, 135 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 61-63, 66, 68; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 135 Assessment Masters, pp. 77-81, 101-105
f. Analyzes characterization (dynamic and static) in prose and plays as delineated through a character’s thoughts, words, speech patterns, and actions; the narrator’s description; and the thoughts, words, and actions of other characters.
SG II: p. 60 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, p. 60 Assessment Masters, pp. 101-105
g. Explains and analyzes the effects of sound, form, figurative language, and graphics in order to uncover meaning in literature: i. Sound (e.g., alliteration, onomatopoeia, internal rhyme, rhyme scheme) ii. Figurative language (e.g., simile, metaphor, personification, and hyperbole)iii. Graphics (e.g., capital letters, line length, word position).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Identifies and analyzes how an author’s use of words creates tone and mood, giving supporting evidence from text.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 25 of 60
i. Identifies and analyzes similarities and differences in traditional literature from different cultures.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
For informational texts, the student reads and comprehends in order to develop understanding and expertise and produces evidence of reading that:
a. Analyzes common textual features to obtain information (e.g., paragraphs, topic sentences, concluding sentences, introduction, conclusion, footnotes, index, bibliography).
Examples: SG I: pp. 5, 11, 32, 33, 42, 47-49, 54; Glossary pp. 169-172 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 5, 11, 32, 33, 42, 47-49, 54 SG II: pp. 5, 111, 173, 178, 181, 185-186, 191, 193; Glossary pp. 225-229 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, p. 5; Unit 5: Visualizing, p. 111; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 173, 178, 181, 185-186, 191, 193 Assessment Masters: pp. 14-17, 21-25, 61-65, 69-73, 117-119 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45; Math, pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45
b. Identifies and uses knowledge of common graphic features to draw conclusions and make judgments (e.g., graphic organizers, diagrams, captions, illustrations).
Examples: SG I: pp. 32-33, 41-43, 46, 53, 117, 123-124, 129, 135, 138, 165 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 32-33, 41-43, 46, 53; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117, 123-124, 135, 138, 165; Blackline Masters, pp. 179, 181, 183 SG II: pp. 5-6, 26-27, 94, 97, 103-105, 109-110, 195, 200, 202, 205-207 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5-6, 26-27; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 94, 97, 103-105, 109-110; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117, 123-124, 135, 138, 165; Blackline Masters, pp. 231-243 Assessment Masters: pp. 47, 55, 63, 72-74, 80, 87-88, 121 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 31, 46-48; Math pp. 30, 41-43
c. Applies knowledge of common organizational structures and patterns (i.e., logical order, cause and effect relationships, comparison and contrast, transitions).
Examples: SG II: pp. 26-28, 31, 41-43, 46-49, 52, 82-85, 88, 99 102-103, 108-109, 158, 165, 200, 206-208 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 26-28, 31, 41-43, 46-49, 52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 82-85, 88, 99, 102-103, 108-109; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 158, 165; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 200, 206-208; Blackline Masters, pp. 234-237 Assessment Masters: pp. 63-65, 71-74, 87
Grade 7 Page 26 of 60
d. Recognizes and traces the development of the author’s argument for and against an issue.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Identifies evidence used to support an argument.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Understands and explains the use of a simple device by following technical directions.
See related material in TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-168D
ELA7R2 The student understands and acquires new vocabulary and uses it correctly in reading and writing. The student
a. Determines the meaning of unfamiliar words using context clues (e.g., contrast, cause and effect, etc.).
SG I: pp. 27-28, 62-63, 106-107, 132, 139, 147. See also Vocabulary exercises throughout. Examples on pp. 2-3, 14-15, 20-21, 29-30 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 27-28; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 62-63, 106; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 132, 139, 147 SG II: pp. 64, 132, 154-155, 176, 188. See also Vocabulary exercises throughout. Examples on pp. 14-15, 29-30, 43-44, 58-59 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, p. 64-65; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 132, 154-155; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 176, 188 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary Assessments throughout. Examples on pp. 11- 12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 43-44, 51-52 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp 8-10
b. Uses knowledge of Greek, Latin, and Anglo-Saxon roots and affixes to determine the meaning of unfamiliar words.
SG I: pp. 8-9, 35-36, 76-77, 91-92, 162-163 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 8-9, 35-36; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 162-163 SG II: pp. 8-9, 35-36, 64-65, 76-77, 91-92 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-9, 35-36; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65, 76-77, 91-92 Assessment Masters: Examples on pp. 43, 51-52, 68 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: p. 10
c. Identifies and explains idioms and analogies in prose and poetry.
SG I: pp. 64-65 TE II: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 64-65 SG II: pp. 162-163 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 162-163
Grade 7 Page 27 of 60
d. Determines word meanings through the use of definition, example, restatement, or contrast.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees an example of it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level I. Examples: SG I: pp. 2-3, 8-9, 14-15, 20-21 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 2-3, 8-9, 14-15, 20-21 SG II: pp. 2-3, 8-9, 14-15, 20-21 TE I: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 2-3, 8-9, 14-15, 20-21 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: See examples on pp. 11, 19, 27, 35, 43, 51, 59, 67, 75, 83, 91, 99, 107, 115
ELA7R3 The student reads aloud, accurately (in the range of 95%), familiar material in a variety of genres, in a way that makes meaning clear to listeners. The student
a. Uses letter-sound knowledge to decode written English and uses a range of cueing systems (e.g., phonics and context clues) to determine pronunciation and meaning.
SG I: pp. 62-63, 106-107, 132-133, 147-148 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 62-63, 106-107; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 132-133, 147-148 SG II: pp. 35-36, 44-45, 58-59, 176-177 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 35-36, 44-45; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 58-59; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 176-177 Assessment Masters: pp. 19-20, 28, 35, 43, 51-52, 59-60
b. Uses self-correction when subsequent reading indicates an earlier miscue (self-monitoring and self-correcting strategies).
Students complete multiple activities dealing with any given reading, allowing them to revisit the reading material and clarify their analysis. In particular, predicting and inferencing activities encourage students to skim or quickly read passages, make predictions or analyze the reading, then reread for accuracy. See:SG I: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 134-140, 143-146, 149-151, 153-155 159-161, 165-167 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 134-140, 143-146, 149-151, 153-155, 159-161, 165-167 SG II: pp. 117-119, 122-125, 128-131, 134-140, 143-146, 149-155, 158-161 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 122-125, 128-131, 134-140, 143-146, 149-155, 158-161, 165-167
Grade 7 Page 28 of 60
c. Reads with a rhythm, flow, and meter that sounds like everyday speech (prosody).
Explicit instruction in oral reading fluency to improve reading achievement is included throughout the AMP program. See for example, instruction on: • Natural breaks (SG I: p. 137) • Relaxed reading (SG I: pp. 54, 81, 128, 146, 149, 164, 167) • Breathing (SG II: pp. 18, 90, 128, 137, 220) • Pace (SG I: pp. 48-49, 52, 55, 104-105, 145; SG II: pp. 24, 48, 98, 166-167, 207, 214, 216-217, 220, 222-223) Students reread, in pairs or in groups, each of the passages in the Student Guides and are guided to carry out their daily independent reading fluently. Through teacher modeling, direct instruction, and tips, students focus on each of the aspects of fluency in each Student Guide unit. A Fluency tip appears with each passage in the Student Guide and is elaborated on in the Teacher’s Edition with suggestions for instruction, modeling, and practice. In addition, with the AMP Reading Online Library, students can repeatedly hear and read along with models of fluent reading.
Reading Across the Curriculum
ELA7RC1 The student reads a minimum of 25 grade-level appropriate books or book equivalents (approximately 1,000,000 words) per year from a variety of subject disciplines. The student reads both informational and fictional texts in a variety of genres and modes of discourse, including technical texts related to various subject areas.
ELA7RC2 The student participates in discussions related to curricular learning in all subject areas. The student
a. Identifies messages and themes from books in all subject areas.
SG I: pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22-26, 28, 31-34, 37, 39-41, 47-49, 52, 54-55 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22-26, 28, 31-34, 37, 39-41, 47-49, 52, 55-54 SG II: pp. 179, 181 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 179, 181 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26
Grade 7 Page 29 of 60
b. Responds to a variety of texts in multiple modes of discourse.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books, and each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. AMP Reading System Level I includes the following: • “Sports on the Edge” (sports, biography) • “Colossal Constructions” (physics, engineering, history) • “Unsolved Mysteries” (history, geography) • “Staying Alive” (history, environmental science) • “Strange Journeys” (science fiction, social studies, science) • “Nature in the Extreme” (geology, history, environmental science) • “Success Stories” (biography, history, earth science, archaeology, medicine, technology) Students respond to these texts by summarizing, questioning, predicting, analyzing structure, visualizing, inferencing, and applying Metacognition skills. In addition, Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
c. Relates messages and themes from one subject area to those in another area.
In several units, students relate information from their own experience to the subject of the text they are reading to enhance their understanding of messages and themes. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 97, 123-124, 129, 135, 165 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, p. 97; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 123-124, 129, 135, 165 SG I: pp. 117-119, 122-125, 128-131, 134, 137, 140, 143, 165-167 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 122-125, 128-131, 134, 137, 140, 143, 165-167 Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts also aid students in relating readings to social studies, science, and math.
d. Evaluates the merits of texts in every subject discipline.
Students assess the merits and relevance of a wide range of texts and apply ideas from them in “After You Read” prompts throughout. See examples: SG I: pp. 34, 37, 40, 43, 46, 49, 52, 55, 60, 63, 72 SG II: pp. 10, 13, 25, 31, 34, 40, 43, 49, 55, 63, 69
Grade 7 Page 30 of 60
e. Examines the author’s purpose in writing.
Examples: SG I: pp. 26-27, 138-139, 154 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 26-27; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 138-139, 154 SG II: pp. 5, 11, 17, 23, 32, 38, 173, 185, 200 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5, 11, 17, 23, 32, 38; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 173, 185, 200 Assessment Masters: pp. 61-65, 69-73, 109-113, 117-121 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 27-31
f. Recognizes and uses the features of disciplinary texts (e.g., charts, graphs, photos, maps, highlighted vocabulary).
Examples: SG I: pp. 82, 117, 135, 138 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 82; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117, 135, 138 SG II: pp. 5-6, 60-63, 66, 72, 104, 207-208 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5-6; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 60-63, 66, 72, 104; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 207-208 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp.32-36
ELA7RC3 The student acquires new vocabulary in each content area and uses it correctly. The student
a. Demonstrates an understanding of contextual vocabulary in various subjects.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level I. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary words analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11, 19, 27, 35, 43, 51, 59, 67, 75, 83, 91, 99, 107, 115
Grade 7 Page 31 of 60
b. Uses content vocabulary in writing and speaking.
In vocabulary lessons throughout, students write their own sentences using or responding to vocabulary words. See examples: SG I: pp. 51, 59, 65, 71, 76, 77, 86, 106, 107 SG II: pp. 29, 35, 51, 58, 59, 70, 71, 76, 77 Additionally, teaching tips in the TE encourage teachers to have students collaborate on ideas for writing sentences and to volunteer and discuss their sentences. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 3, 9, 21, 30, 45 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 3, 9, 21, 30, 45
c. Explores understanding of new words found in subject area texts.
SG I/II: Vocabulary exercises throughout the Student Guides focus on words that are found in the subject area reading assignments. In addition to previously noted strategies, students also explore synonyms and antonyms, how prefixes and suffixes change a base word, parts of speech, analogies, shades of meaning, word families, word origins, idioms, connotation and denotation, and so on. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78, 106-109 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52; Unit II: Questioning, pp. 64- 66, 76-78, 106-109 SG II: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-66, 76-78 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10
ELA7RC4 The student establishes a context for information acquired by reading across subject areas. The student
a. Explores life experiences related to subject area content.
“After You Read” and “Beyond the Text” questions help students relate personal life experiences to the subject area content. See examples: SG I: pp. 4, 13, 43, 46, 86, 97, 99 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 4, 13, 43, 46; Unit II: Questioning: pp. 86, 97, 99 SG II: pp. 16, 37, 52, 60, 116, 143 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 16, 37, 52, 60; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp.116, 143
b. Discusses in both writing and speaking how certain words and concepts relate to multiple subjects.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 32 of 60
c. Determines strategies for finding content and contextual meaning for unfamiliar words or concepts.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level I. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary words analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11, 19, 27, 35, 43, 51, 59, 67, 75, 83, 91, 99, 107, 115
Writing
The student writes clear, coherent text that develops a central idea or tells a story. The writing shows consideration of the audience and purpose. The student progresses through the stages of the writing process (e.g., prewriting, drafting, revising, and editing successive versions).
ELA7W1 The student produces writing that establishes an appropriate organizational structure, sets a context and engages the reader, maintains a coherent focus throughout, and provides a satisfying closure. The student
a. Selects a focus, an organizational structure, and a point of view based on purpose, genre expectations, audience, length, and format requirements.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
b. Writes texts of a length appropriate to address the topic or tell the story.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
Grade 7 Page 33 of 60
c. Uses traditional structures for conveying information (e.g., chronological order, cause and effect, similarity and difference, and posing and answering a question).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
d. Uses appropriate structures to ensure coherence (e.g., transition elements).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
e. Supports statements and claims with anecdotes, descriptions, facts and statistics, and specific examples.
TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
ELA7W2 The student demonstrates competence in a variety of genres.
The student produces a narrative (fictional, personal, experiential) that:
a. Engages readers by establishing and developing a plot, setting, and point of view that are appropriate to the story (e.g., varied beginnings, standard plot line, cohesive devices, and a sharpened focus).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G
b. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Develops characters using standard methods of characterization.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Includes sensory details and concrete language to develop plot, setting, and character (e.g., vivid verbs, descriptive adjectives, and varied sentence structures).
The use of sensory words in covered in: SG II, pp. 67-68, 72-75, 78, 109, 207-208 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67-68, 72-75, 78, 109; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 207-208
e. Excludes extraneous details and inconsistencies.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 34 of 60
f. Uses a range of strategies (e.g., suspense, figurative language, dialogue, expanded vocabulary, flashback, movement, gestures, expressions, tone, and mood).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Provides a sense of closure to the writing.
TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168F; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 229
The student produces writing (multi-paragraph expository composition such as description, explanation, comparison and contrast, or problem and solution) that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
b.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Develops a controlling idea that conveys a perspective on the subject.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
c.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
d. Develops the topic with supporting details.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
f. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
g.
TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226
f. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
Grade 7 Page 35 of 60
g. Concludes with a detailed summary linked to the purpose of the composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
The student produces technical writing (business correspondence: memoranda, emails, letters of inquiry, letters of complaint, instructions and procedures, lab reports, slide presentations) that:
a. Creates or follows an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Applies rules of Standard English. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a response to literature that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, or otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Demonstrates an understanding of the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Organizes an interpretation around several clear ideas, premises, or images from the original work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Supports a judgment through references to the text and personal knowledge.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Justifies interpretations through sustained use of examples and textual evidence from the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 36 of 60
f. Provides a sense of closure to the writing.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a multi-paragraph persuasive essay that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. States a clear position or perspective in support of a proposition or proposal.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Describes the points in support of the proposition, employing well-articulated, relevant evidence.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Excludes information and arguments that are irrelevant.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to a specific purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Anticipates and addresses readers’ concerns and counter-arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Provides a sense of closure to the writing.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA7W3 The student uses research and technology to support writing. The student
a. Identifies topics, asks and evaluates questions, and develops ideas leading to inquiry, investigation, and research.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 37 of 60
b. Gives credit for both quoted and paraphrased information in a bibliography by using a consistent and sanctioned format and methodology for citations.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Includes researched information in different types of products (e.g., compositions, multimedia presentations, graphic organizers, projects, etc.).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Documents sources. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Uses electronic media to locate relevant information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA7W4 The student consistently uses the writing process to develop, revise, and evaluate writing. The student
a. Plans and drafts independently and resourcefully.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Uses strategies of note taking, outlining, and summarizing to impose structure on composition drafts.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Revises manuscripts to improve the organization and consistency of ideas within and between paragraphs.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
d. Edits writing to improve word choice after checking the precision of the vocabulary.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Grade 7 Page 38 of 60
Conventions
ELA7C1 The student demonstrates understanding and control of the rules of the English language, realizing that usage involves the appropriate application of conventions and grammar in both written and spoken formats. The student
a. Identifies and writes simple, compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences correctly, punctuating properly, avoiding fragments and run-ons, adding or deleting modifiers, combining or revising sentences.
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56C-E; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-172 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
b. Identifies and writes correctly punctuated adjective and adverb clauses.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Uses standard subject-verb and pronoun-antecedent agreement.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Identifies and uses verb tenses consistently (simple and perfect).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Demonstrates correct usage of comparative and superlative forms of adjectives and adverbs.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Demonstrates appropriate comma and semicolon usage (compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences, and split dialogue).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Distinguishes differences in meaning and spelling of commonly confused homonyms.
SG II: pp. 188-189 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 188-189
Grade 7 Page 39 of 60
h. Produces final drafts/presentations that demonstrate accurate spelling and the correct use of punctuation and capitalization.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Listening/Speaking/Viewing
ELA7LSV1 The student participates in student-to-teacher, student-to-student, and group verbal interactions. The student
a. Initiates new topics in addition to responding to adult-initiated topics.
Many oral language activities throughout TE I/II encourage student-initiated topics, particularly “After Students Read” sections. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 13, 40, 43, 52 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 7, 13, 15, 19
b. Asks relevant questions. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Responds to questions with appropriate information.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 58, 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71
d. Confirms understanding by paraphrasing the adult’s directions or suggestions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Displays appropriate turn-taking behaviors.
Students take turns with partners or in small groups to read aloud, analyze, discuss, etc. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 115, 118, 121, 124, 127, 130, 136, 137, 139, 142
f. Actively solicits another person’s comments or opinions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Offers own opinion forcefully without domineering.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Responds appropriately to comments and questions.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 58, 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71
i. Volunteers contributions and responds when directly solicited by teacher or discussion leader.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 58, 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71
Grade 7 Page 40 of 60
j. Gives reasons in support of opinions expressed.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 125, 129, 135, 151, 153, 166 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117, 121, 127, 135, 145
k. Clarifies, illustrates, or expands on a response when asked to do so.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 67, 82, 97 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 171, 190, 202, 217
l. Employs a group decision-making technique such as brainstorming or a problem solving sequence (e.g., recognizes problem, defines problem, identifies possible solutions, selects optimal solution, implements solution, evaluates solution).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
m. Develops an outline that highlights the important issues discussed.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA7LSV2 The student listens to and views various forms of text and media in order to gather and share information, persuade others, and express and understand ideas. The student will select and critically analyze messages using rubrics as assessment tools.
When responding to visual and oral texts and media (e.g., television, radio, film productions, and electronic media), the student:
a. Analyzes the effect on the viewer of image, text, and sound in electronic journalism.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 41 of 60
b. Identifies the techniques used to achieve the effects studied in each instance. When delivering and responding to presentations, the student:
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
When delivering or responding to presentations, the student:
a. Gives oral presentations or dramatic interpretations for various purposes.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Organizes information to achieve particular purposes and to appeal to the background and interests of the audience.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Shows appropriate changes in delivery (e.g., gestures, vocabulary, pace, visuals).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Uses language for dramatic effect. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Uses rubrics as assessment tools. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Responds to oral communications with questions, challenges, or affirmations.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Uses multimedia in presentations. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 42 of 60
CORRELATION TO THE GEORGIA PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
Subject Area: Language Arts State-Funded Course: Language Arts/Grade 8 Textbook Title: AMP Reading System, Level I_(Orange)____________________________ Publisher: Pearson
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
Reading and Literature
ELA8R1 The student demonstrates comprehension and shows evidence of a warranted and responsible explanation of a variety of literary and informational texts.
For literary texts, the student identifies the characteristics of various genres and produces evidence of reading that:
a. Identifies the difference between the concepts of theme in a literary work and author’s purpose in an expository text.
Throughout the AMP program, students preview, discuss, and review author purpose and theme. See examples: SG I: pp. 5, 11, 13, 17, 23, 26, 32 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 5, 11, 13, 17, 23, 26, 32 SG II: pp. 5, 11, 17, 18, 22, 23, 26 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5, 11, 17, 18, 22, 23, 26 Assessment Masters: pp. 21-25, 69-73
b. Compares and contrasts genre characteristics from two or more selections of literature.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Analyzes a character’s traits, emotions, or motivations and gives supporting evidence from the text(s).
SG II: pp. 135-136 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 135-136 Assessment Masters: pp. 101-105
Grade 8 Page 43 of 60
d. Compares and contrasts motivations and reactions of literary characters from different historical eras confronting similar situations or conflicts.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Evaluates recurring or similar themes across a variety of selections, distinguishing theme from topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Evaluates the structural elements of the plot (e.g., subplots, climax), the plot’s development, and the way in which conflicts are (or are not) addressed and resolved.
SG I: pp. 135-136 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 135-136 SG II: pp. 61-63, 66, 68, 135 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 61-63, 66, 68; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 135 Assessment Masters, pp. 77-81, 101-105
g. Analyzes and evaluates the effects of sound, form, figurative language, and graphics in order to uncover meaning in literature:
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Sound (e.g., alliteration, onomatopoeia, internal rhyme, rhyme scheme, meter)
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ii. Figurative language (e.g., simile, metaphor, personification, hyperbole, symbolism, imagery).
SG II: pp. 67-68, 72-75, 78, 109, 207-208 TE II: Unit 5:Visualizing, pp. 67-68, 72-75, 78, 109; Unit 7: Metacognition, 207-208 Assessment Masters, pp. 80, 88, 89
h. Analyzes and evaluates how an author’s use of words creates tone and mood and provides supporting details from text.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
For informational texts, the student reads and comprehends in order to develop understanding and expertise and produces evidence of reading that:
Grade 8 Page 44 of 60
a. Analyzes and evaluates common textual features (e.g., paragraphs, topic sentences, concluding sentences, introduction, conclusion, footnotes, index, bibliography).
Examples: SG I: pp. 5, 11, 32, 33, 42, 47-49, 54; Glossary pp. 169-172 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 5, 11, 32, 33, 42, 47-49, 54 SG II: pp. 5, 111, 173, 178, 181, 185-186, 191, 193; Glossary pp. 225-229 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, p. 5; Unit 5: Visualizing, p. 111; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 173, 178, 181, 185-186, 191, 193 Assessment Masters: pp. 14-17, 21-25, 61-65, 69-73, 117-119 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45; Math, pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45
b. Applies, analyzes, and evaluates common organizational structures (e.g., graphic organizers, logical order, cause and effect relationships, comparison and contrast).
Examples: SG I: pp. 32-33, 41-43, 46, 53, 117, 123-124, 129, 135, 138, 165 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 32-33, 41-43, 46, 53; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117, 123-124, 135, 138, 165; Blackline Masters, pp. 179, 181, 183 SG II: pp. 5-6, 26-28, 31, 41-43, 52, 82-85, 94, 97, 103-105, 109-110, 195, 200, 202, 205-207 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5-6, 26-28, 31, 41-43, 52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 82-85, 94, 97, 103-105, 109-110; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117, 123- 124, 135, 138, 165; Blackline Masters, pp. 231-243 Assessment Masters: pp. 47, 55, 63, 72-74, 80, 87-88, 121 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 31, 46-48; Math pp. 30, 41-43
c. Recognizes and traces the development of an author’s argument, point of view, or perspective in text.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Understands and explains the use of a complex mechanical device by following technical directions.
See related material in TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-168D
e. Uses information from a variety of consumer, workplace, and public documents (e.g., job applications) to explain a situation or decision and to solve a problem.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 45 of 60
ELA8R2 The student understands and acquires new vocabulary and uses it correctly in reading and writing. The student
a. Determines pronunciations, meanings, alternate word choices, parts of speech, or etymologies of words.
See the following examples: SG I: pp. 20, 50, 58-59, 62-63, 76, 108, 139, 147 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 20, 50, 58-59; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 62-63, 76, 108; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 139, 147 SG II: pp. 8, 10, 36-37, 58-59, 105, 187, 195-196, 218 TE: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8, 10, 36-37; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 58-59, 105; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 187, 195-196, 218 Assessment Masters: pp. 20, 27-28, 36, 44, 67-68
b. Determines the meaning of unfamiliar words in content and context specific to reading and writing.
SG I: pp. 27-28, 62-63, 106-107, 132, 139, 147. See also Vocabulary exercises throughout. Examples on pp. 2-3, 14-15, 20-21, 29-30 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 27-28; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 62-63, 106; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 132, 139, 147 SG II: pp. 64, 132, 154-155, 176, 188. See also Vocabulary exercises throughout. Examples on pp. 14-15, 29-30, 43-44, 58-59 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, p. 64-65; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 132, 154-155; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 176, 188 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary Assessments throughout. Examples on pp. 11- 12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 43-44, 51-52 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp 8-10
c. Demonstrates an initial understanding of the history of the English Language.
SG I: pp. 8, 35, 76, 91, 162 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 8, 35; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 162 SG II: pp. 8, 35, 64, 76, 91 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8, 35; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64, 76, 91 Assessment Masters: Examples on pp. 43, 51-52, 68 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: p. 10
Grade 8 Page 46 of 60
ELA8R3 The student reads aloud, accurately (in the range of 95%), familiar material in a variety of genres, in a way that makes meaning clear to listeners. The student
a. Uses letter-sound knowledge to decode written English and uses a range of cueing systems (e.g., phonics and context clues) to determine pronunciation and meaning.
SG I: pp. 62-63, 106-107, 132-133, 147-148 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 62-63, 106-107; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 132-133, 147-148 SG II: pp. 35-36, 44-45, 58-59, 176-177 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 35-36, 44-45; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 58-59; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 176-177 Assessment Masters: pp. 19-20, 28, 35, 43, 51-52, 59-60
b. Uses self-correction when subsequent reading indicates an earlier miscue (self-monitoring and self-correcting strategies).
Students complete multiple activities dealing with any given reading, allowing them to revisit the reading material and clarify their analysis. In particular, predicting and inferencing activities encourage students to skim or quickly read passages, make predictions or analyze the reading, then reread for accuracy. See: SG I: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 134-140, 143-146, 149-151, 153-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 134-140, 143-146, 149-151, 153-155, 159-161, 165-167 SG II: pp. 117-119, 122-125, 128-131, 134-140, 143-146, 149-155, 158-161, 165-167 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 122-125, 128-131, 134-140, 143-146, 149-155, 158-161, 165-167 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 93-97
Grade 8 Page 47 of 60
c. Reads with a rhythm, flow, and meter that sounds like everyday speech (prosody).
Explicit instruction in oral reading fluency to improve reading achievement is included throughout the AMP program. See for example, instruction on: • Natural breaks (SG I: p. 137) • Relaxed reading (SG I: pp. 54, 81, 128, 146, 149, 164, 167) • Breathing (SG II: pp. 18, 90, 128, 137, 220) • Pace (SG I: pp. 48-49, 52, 55, 104-105, 145; SG II: pp. 24, 48, 98, 166- 167, 207, 214, 216-217, 220, 222-223) Students reread, in pairs or in groups, each of the passages in the Student Guides and are guided to carry out their daily independent reading fluently. Through teacher modeling, direct instruction, and tips, students focus on each of the aspects of fluency in each Student Guide unit. A Fluency tip appears with each passage in the Student Guide and is elaborated on in the Teacher’s Edition with suggestions for instruction, modeling, and practice. In addition, with the AMP Reading Online Library, students can repeatedly hear and read along with models of fluent reading.
ELA8R4 The student acquires knowledge of Georgia authors and significant text created by them. The student
a. Identifies a variety of Georgia authors both male and female.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Identifies authors’ connections to Georgia through a variety of materials including electronic media.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Identifies award winning Georgia authors. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Examines texts from different genres (e.g. picture books, poetry, short stories, novels, essays, informational writing, and dramatic literature) created by Georgia authors.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Relates literary works created by Georgia authors to historical settings and or events.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Explains how Georgia is reflected in a literary work through setting, characterization, historical context, or current events.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 48 of 60
g. Evaluates recurring or similar themes across a variety of selections written by Georgia authors, distinguishing theme from topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Reading Across the Curriculum
ELA8RC1 The student reads a minimum of 25 grade-level appropriate books or book equivalents (approximately 1,000,000 words) per year from a variety of subject disciplines. The student reads both informational and fictional texts in a variety of genres and modes of discourse, including technical texts related to various subject areas.
ELA8RC2 The student participates in discussions related to curricular learning in all subject areas. The student
a. Identifies messages and themes from books in all subject areas.
SG I: pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22-26, 28, 31-34, 37, 39-41, 47-49, 52, 54-55 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22-26, 28, 31-34, 37, 39-41, 47-49, 52, 55-54 SG II: pp. 179, 181 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 179, 181 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 13-16
Grade 8 Page 49 of 60
b. Responds to a variety of texts in multiple modes of discourse.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books, and each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. AMP Reading System Level I includes the following: • “Sports on the Edge” (sports, biography) • “Colossal Constructions” (physics, engineering, history) • “Unsolved Mysteries” (history, geography) • “Staying Alive” (history, environmental science) • “Strange Journeys” (science fiction, social studies, science) • “Nature in the Extreme” (geology, history, environmental science) • “Success Stories” (biography, history, earth science, archaeology, medicine, technology) Students respond to these texts by summarizing, questioning, predicting, analyzing structure, visualizing, inferencing, and applying Metacognition skills. In addition, Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
c. Relates messages and themes from one subject area to those in another area.
In several units, students relate information from their own experience to the subject of the text they are reading to enhance their understanding of messages and themes. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 97, 123-124, 129, 135, 165 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, p. 97; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 123-124, 129, 135, 165 SG I: pp. 117-119, 122-125, 128-131, 134, 137, 140, 143, 165-167 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 122-125, 128-131, 134, 137, 140, 143, 165-167 Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts also aid students in relating readings to social studies, science, and math.
d. Evaluates the merits of texts in every subject discipline.
Students assess the merits and relevance of a wide range of texts and apply ideas from them in “After You Read” prompts throughout. See examples: SG I: pp. 34, 37, 40, 43, 46, 49, 52, 55, 60, 63, 72 SG II: pp. 10, 13, 25, 31, 34, 40, 43, 49, 55, 63, 69
Grade 8 Page 50 of 60
e. Examines the author’s purpose in writing. Examples: SG I: pp. 26-27, 138-139, 154 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 26-27; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 138-139, 154 SG II: pp. 5, 11, 17, 23, 32, 38, 173, 185, 200 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5, 11, 17, 23, 32, 38; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 173, 185, 200 Assessment Masters: pp. 61-65, 69-73, 109-113, 117-121 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 27-31
f. Recognizes and uses the features of disciplinary texts (e.g., charts, graphs, photos, maps, highlighted vocabulary).
Examples: SG I: pp. 82, 117, 135, 138 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 82; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117, 135, 138 SG II: pp. 5-6, 60-63, 66, 72, 104, 207-208 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5-6; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 60-63, 66, 72, 104; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 207-208 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp.32-36
ELA8RC3 The student acquires new vocabulary in each content area and uses it correctly. The student
a. Demonstrates an understanding of contextual vocabulary in various subjects.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level I. Customized Reading Stratgies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary words analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11, 19, 27, 35, 43, 51, 59, 67, 75, 83, 91, 99, 107, 115
b. Uses content vocabulary in writing and speaking.
In vocabulary lessons throughout, students write their own sentences using or responding to vocabulary words. See examples: SG I: pp. 51, 59, 65, 71, 76, 77, 86, 106, 107 SG II: pp. 29, 35, 51, 58, 59, 70, 71, 76, 77 Additionally, teaching tips in the TE encourage teachers to have students collaborate on ideas for writing sentences and to volunteer and discuss their sentences. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 3, 9, 21, 30, 45 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 3, 9, 21, 30, 45
Grade 8 Page 51 of 60
c. Explores understanding of new words found in subject area texts.
SG I/II: Vocabulary exercises throughout the Student Guides focus on words that are found in the subject area reading assignments. In addition to previously noted strategies, students also explore synonyms and antonyms, how prefixes and suffixes change a base word, parts of speech, analogies, shades of meaning, word families, word origins, idioms, connotation and denotation, and so on. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78, 106-109 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52; Unit II: Questioning, pp. 64- 66, 76-78, 106-109 SG II: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-66, 76-78 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10
ELA8RC4 The student establishes a context for information acquired by reading across subject areas. The student
a. Explores life experiences related to subject area content.
“After You Read” and “Beyond the Text” questions help students relate personal life experiences to the subject area content. See examples: SG I: pp. 4, 13, 43, 46, 86, 97, 99 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 4, 13, 43, 46; Unit II: Questioning: pp. 86, 97, 99 SG II: pp. 16, 37, 52, 60, 116, 143 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 16, 37, 52, 60; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 116, 143
b. Discusses in both writing and speaking how certain words and concepts relate to multiple subjects.
c. Determines strategies for finding content and contextual meaning for unfamiliar words or concepts.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level I. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary words analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11, 19, 27, 35, 43, 51, 59, 67, 75, 83, 91, 99, 107, 115
Grade 8 Page 52 of 60
Writing
ELA8W1 The student produces writing that establishes an appropriate organizational structure, sets a context and engages the reader, maintains a coherent focus throughout, and signals a satisfying closure. The student
a. Selects a focus, organizational structure, and a point of view based on purpose, genre expectations, audience, length, and format requirements.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
b. Writes texts of a length appropriate to address the topic or tell the story.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Uses traditional structures for conveying information (e.g., chronological order, cause and effect, similarity and difference, and posing and answering a question).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
d. Uses appropriate structures to ensure coherence (e.g., transition elements, parallel structure).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
e. Supports statements and claims with anecdotes, descriptions, facts and statistics, and specific examples.
TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
ELA8W2 The student demonstrates competence in a variety of genres.
The student produces a narrative (fictional, personal, experiential) that:
a. Engages readers by establishing and developing a plot, setting, and point of view that are appropriate to the story (e.g., varied beginnings, standard plot line, cohesive devices, and a sharpened focus).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G
Grade 8 Page 53 of 60
b. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Relates a clear, coherent incident, event, or situation by using well-chosen details.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Reveals the significance of the writer’s attitude about the subject.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Develops complex major and minor characters using standard methods of characterization.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Includes sensory details and concrete language to develop plot, setting, and character (e.g., vivid verbs, descriptive adjectives, varied sentence structures, and specific narrative action).
The use of sensory words in covered in: SG II, pp. 67-68, 72-75, 78, 109, 207-208 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67-68, 72-75, 78, 109; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 207-208
g. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Uses a range of strategies (e.g., suspense, figurative language, dialogue, expanded vocabulary, flashback, movement, gestures, expressions, foreshadowing, tone, and mood).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Provides a sense of closure appropriate to the writing.
TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168F; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 229
The student produces writing (multi-paragraph expository composition such as description, explanation, comparison and contrast, or problem and solution) that:
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Develops a controlling idea that conveys a perspective on the subject.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Grade 8 Page 54 of 60
c. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
d. Develops the topic with supporting details.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
e. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226
f. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
g. Concludes with a detailed summary linked to the purpose of the composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
The student produces technical writing (business correspondence: letters of application and letters of recommendation, résumés, abstracts, user guides or manuals, web pages).
a. Creates or follows an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Applies rules of Standard English. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a response to literature that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, or otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Demonstrates an understanding of the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Supports a judgment through references to the text and personal knowledge.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 55 of 60
d. Justifies interpretations through sustained use of examples and textual evidence from the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Supports a judgment through references to the text, references to other works, authors, or non-print media, or references to personal knowledge.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Produces a judgment that is interpretive, analytic, evaluative, or reflective (orally, graphically, in writing).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Anticipates and answers a reader’s questions. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a multi-paragraph persuasive essay that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. States a clear position or perspective in support of a proposition or proposal.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Creates an organizing structure that is appropriate to the needs, values, and interests of a specified audience, and arranges details, reasons, and examples.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Includes appropriate relevant information and arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Excludes information and arguments that are irrelevant.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Provides details, reasons, and examples, arranging them effectively by anticipating and answering reader concerns and counter-arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 56 of 60
g. Supports arguments with detailed evidence, citing sources of information as appropriate.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Anticipates and addresses reader concerns and counter-arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a piece of writing drawn from research that:
a. Poses relevant and tightly drawn questions about the topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Engages the reader by establishing a context. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Conveys clear and accurate perspectives on the subject.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. States a thesis. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Records important ideas, concepts, and direct quotations from significant information sources, and paraphrases and summarizes all perspectives on the topic, as appropriate.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Uses a variety of primary and secondary sources and distinguishes the nature and value of each.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Organizes and displays information on charts, maps, and graphs.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Provides a sense of closure to the writing.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Documents resources (bibliography, footnotes, endnotes, etc.).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 57 of 60
ELA8W3 The student uses research and technology to support writing. The student
a. Plans and conducts multiple-step information searches by using computer networks and modems.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Achieves an effective balance between researched information and original ideas.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Avoids plagiarism. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA8W4 The student consistently uses the writing process to develop, revise, and evaluate writing. The student
a. Plans and drafts independently and resourcefully.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Revises writing for appropriate organization, consistent point of view, and transitions between paragraphs, passages, and ideas.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Edits writing to improve word choice, grammar, punctuation, etc.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Conventions
ELA8C1 The student demonstrates understanding and control of the rules of the English language, realizing that usage involves the appropriate application of conventions and grammar in both written and spoken formats. The student
a. Declines pronouns by gender and case, and demonstrates correct usage in sentences.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Analyzes and uses simple, compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences correctly, punctuates properly, and avoids fragments and run-ons.
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56C-E; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-172 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
Grade 8 Page 58 of 60
c. Revises sentences by correcting misplaced and dangling modifiers.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Revises sentences by correcting errors in usage.
TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, p. 170
e. Demonstrates appropriate comma and semicolon usage (compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences, split dialogue, and for clarity).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Analyzes the structure of a sentence (basic sentence parts, noun-adjective adverb clauses and phrases).
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56C-E; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 112C-E; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 56E-G
g. Produces final drafts/presentations that demonstrate accurate spelling and the correct use of punctuation and capitalization.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Listening/Speaking/Viewing
ELA8LSV1 The student participates in student-to-teacher, student-to-student, and group verbal interactions. The student
a. Initiates new topics in addition to responding to adult-initiated topics.
Many oral language activities throughout TE I/II encourage student-initiated topics, particularly “After Students Read” sections. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 13, 40, 43, 52 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 7, 13, 15, 19
b. Asks relevant questions. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Responds to questions with appropriate information.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 58, 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71
d. Confirms understanding by paraphrasing the adult’s directions or suggestions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Displays appropriate turn-taking behaviors. Students take turns with partners or in small groups to read aloud, analyze, discuss, etc. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 115, 118, 121, 124, 127, 130, 136, 137, 139, 142
Grade 8 Page 59 of 60
f. Actively solicits another person’s comments or opinions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Offers own opinion forcefully without domineering.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Responds appropriately to comments and questions.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 58, 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71
i. Volunteers contributions and responds when directly solicited by teacher or discussion leader.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 58, 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71
j. Gives reasons in support of opinions expressed. Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 125, 129, 135, 151, 153, 166 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117, 121, 127, 135, 145
k. Clarifies, illustrates, or expands on a response when asked to do so.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 67, 82, 97 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 171, 190, 202, 217
l. Employs a group decision-making technique such as brainstorming or a problem-solving sequence (e.g., recognizes problem, defines problem, identifies possible solutions, selects optimal solution, implements solution, evaluates solution).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
m. Develops a plan of action or agenda for written and/or verbal follow-up.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA8LSV2 The student listens to and views various forms of text and media in order to gather and share information, persuade others, and express and understand ideas. The student will select and critically analyze messages using rubrics as assessment tools.
When responding to visual and oral texts and media (e.g., television, radio, film productions, and electronic media), the student:
Grade 8 Page 60 of 60
a. Interprets and evaluates the various ways in which visual image makers (e.g., graphic artists, illustrators, news photographers) communicate information and affect impressions and opinions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Analyzes oral communication by paraphrasing a speaker’s purpose and point of view, and asks relevant questions concerning the speaker’s content, delivery, and purpose.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
When delivering and responding to presentations, the student:
a. Gives oral presentations or dramatic interpretations for various purposes.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Organizes information (e.g., message, vocabulary) to achieve particular purposes and to appeal to the background and interests of the audience.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Shows appropriate changes in delivery (e.g., gestures, expression, tone, pace, visuals).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Uses language for dramatic effect. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Uses rubrics as assessment tools. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Responds to oral communications with questions, challenges, or affirmations.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Uses multimedia for presentations. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
AMP READING SYSTEM LEVEL II
Correlated to: GEORGIA PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
Language Arts
Grade 6-8
Copyright © 2008 Pearson Education, Inc. or its affiliate(s). All rights reserved.
Grade 6 Page 2 of 80
CORRELATION TO THE GEORGIA PERFORMANCE STANDARDS Subject Area: Language Arts State-Funded Course: Language Arts/Grade 6 Textbook Title: AMP Reading System, Level II (Green) Publisher: Pearson
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
ELA6R1 Reading and Literature The student demonstrates comprehension and shows evidence of a warranted and responsible explanation of a variety of literary and informational texts.
Direct and intensive teaching of comprehension strategies, one strategy at a time, is the foundation of AMP Reading. Each strategy is taught, practiced, and applied in the course of a unit, and comprehension monitoring is taught with each strategy. See: TE I: pp. T14-17, T20 Unit I: Summarizing; Unit 2: Questioning; Unit 3: Predicting TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure; Unit 5: Visualizing; Unit 6: Inferencing; Unit 7: Metacognition Student Guide: Multiple comprehension strategies are used throughout, including previewing, problem/solution analysis, analyzing sequence, summarizing, comparing and contrasting, understanding cause and effect, using text clues, using picture clues, likening to personal experience, using inferences, making predictions, and so forth. Lessons begin with an activity that includes an explanation of the strategy and how it helps students become better readers. There is an illustration or passage used to demonstrate the strategy and immediate opportunity for student response in the margin. After the initial activity, further question/response reading comprehension activities are included for additional reinforcement. See the following examples: SG I: Unit I, Animal Tricks and Treks pp. 4-7,10-13, 16-19, 22-28, ,31-34, 37- 43, 46-49, 52-55 SG II: Unit 4, Living Your Dream pp. 4-7, 10-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 46-49, 52-55 Assessment Masters: Assessment of student comprehension is continuous and ongoing. Each unit includes a Mid-Unit Assessment and an End-of-Unit Assessment. See examples on pages 13-17, 21-25, 29-33, 37-41 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, and Math: pp13-16,28-31
Grade 6 Page 3 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
For literary texts, the student identifies the characteristics of various genres and produces evidence of reading that:
a. Identifies and analyzes sensory details and figurative language.
SG II: pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109-111, 206-208 TE II:Unit 5:Visualizing, pp. 67,73-75,78,109; Unit 7: Metacognition, p206-208 Assessment Masters: pp. 80, 81, 87, 120
b. Identifies and analyzes the author’s use of dialogue and description.
SG I: pp. 95, 160 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, p. 95; Unit 3: Predicting, p. 160 SG II: pp. 5, 11, 23-25, 67-69, 72-74, 82, 109-111, 200, 206-208 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5, 11, 23-25; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67-69, 72-74, 82, 109-111; Unit 7: Metacognition: pp. 200-208 Assessment Masters: pp. 80, 81, 87, 88, 89
c. Relates a literary work to historical events of the period.
SG I: pp. 83, 109, 110, 124, 130, 139, 144, 153, 154, 160, 165, 166 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 83, 109, 110; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 124, 130, 139, 144, 153, 154, 160, 165, 166 SG II: pp. 83, 95, 97, 98, 104, 138, 139, 154, 207, 210, 216 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 83, 95, 97, 98, 104; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 138, 139, 154; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 207, 210, 216 Assessment Masters: pp. 29-33, 50, 61-65, 101-106, 109-114
d. Applies knowledge of the concept that theme refers to the message about life and the world that the author wants us to understand whether implied or stated.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Identifies and analyzes the elements of setting, characterization, plot, and the resolution of the conflict of a story or play:
i. internal/external conflicts ii. character conflicts, characters vs. nature, characters vs. society iii. antagonist/protagonist.
Examples: SG I: pp. 80-81, 95, 136-137, 160 TE I: pp.Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 80-81, 95; Unit 3: Predicting, pp.136-137, 160 SG II: pp. 4, 11-13, 116, 119, 123 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 11-13; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 116, 119,123 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 93-97
Grade 6 Page 4 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
f. Identifies the speaker and recognizes the difference between first- and third-person narration.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Defines and explains how tone is conveyed in literature through word choice, sentence structure, punctuation, rhythm, repetition, and rhyme.
SG I: pp. 93, 95 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, p. 95 SG II: pp. 93, 95 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 93, 95
h. Responds to and explains the effects of sound, figurative language, and graphics in order to uncover meaning in literature:
i. Sound (e.g., alliteration, onomatopoeia, rhyme scheme)
ii. Figurative language (i.e., simile, metaphor, hyperbole, personification)
iii. Graphics (i.e., capital letters, line length, bold face print, italics).
SG I: pp. 136, 138 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 136, 138
i. Compares traditional literature and mythology from different cultures.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
j. Identifies and analyzes similarities and differences in mythologies from different cultures.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
For informational texts, the student reads and comprehends in order to develop
understanding and expertise and produces evidence of reading that:
Grade 6 Page 5 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
a. Applies knowledge of common textual features (e.g., paragraphs, topic sentences, concluding sentences, glossary, index).
Examples: SG I: pp. 5-7, 10-12, 17-18, 24, 26-27, 41-43, 46-47, 49, 52-55; Glossary pp. 169-172 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 5-7, 10-12, 17-18, 24, 26-27, 41-43, 46-47, 49, 52-55 SG II: pp. 173, 175, 178, 185-186, 191, 193; Glossary pp. 225-229 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 173, 175, 178, 185-186, 191, 193 Assessment Masters: pp. 16, 23 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45; Math, pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45
b. Applies knowledge of common graphic features (i.e., graphic organizers, diagrams, captions, illustrations, charts, tables, graphs).
Examples: SG I: pp. 53, 61, 62, 117, 138, 136, 138, 165; TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, p. 53; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 61, 62, 117; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 136, 138, 165; Blackline Masters, pp. 179, 181, 183 SG II: pp. 61, 94, 97, 103, 108, 109, 110, 202, 205 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 61, 94, 97, 103, 108, 109, 110; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 202, 205; Blackline Masters, pp. 231-243 Assessment Masters: pp. 24, 80, 89, 121 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 31, 46-48; Math pp. 30, 41-43
c. Applies knowledge of common organizational structures and patterns (e.g., transitions, logical order, cause and effect, classification schemes).
Examples: SG II: pp. 38-39, 41-43, 46-47, 49, 52, 94, 103-105, 153-155, 158, 165, 200 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 38-39, 51-53, 56-57, 59, 52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 94, 103-105; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 153-155, 158, 165; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 200; Blackline Masters, pp. 234-237
Grade 6 Page 6 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
Assessment Masters: pp. 61-65, 69-73
d. Identifies and analyzes main ideas, supporting ideas, and supporting details.
While activities supporting this standard are found throughout the AMP Reading System, identifying and analyzing main ideas, supporting ideas, and supporting details is the particular focus of Unit 1: Summarizing. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 4-7, 10-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 46-50, 52-56 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 4-7, 10-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 46-50, 52-56 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math, pp. 13-16
e. Follows multi-step instructions to complete or create a simple product.
TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-168D
The student understands and acquires new vocabulary and uses it correctly in reading and writing. The student
ELA6R2
a. Determines the meaning of unfamiliar words by using word, sentence, and paragraph clues.
SG I: pp. See Vocabulary Exercises throughout. Examples on pp. 2-3, 14-15, 20-21, 29-30 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 2-3, 14-15, 20-21, 29-30 SG II: See Vocabulary Exercises throughout. Examples on pp. 8-9, 20-21, 35- 36, 64-65, 132-133 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-9, 20-21, 35-36; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 132-133 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary Assessments throughout. Examples on pp. 11- 12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 43-44, 51-52
Grade 6 Page 7 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp 8-10
b. Uses knowledge of Greek and Latin affixes to understand unfamiliar vocabulary.
SG I: pp. 8-9, 50-51, 64-65, 76-77, 132-133, 147-148 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 8-9, 50-51; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 64-65, 76- 77; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 132-133, 147-148 SG II: pp. 8-9, 64-65, 106-107, 120-121 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-9; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65, 106-107; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121 Assessment Masters: Examples on pp. 20, 28, 52, 100 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: p. 10
c. Identifies and interprets words with multiple meanings.
SG I: p. 106 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, p. 106 SG II: p. 35 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, p. 35
d. Uses reference skills to determine pronunciations, meanings, alternate word choices, and parts of speech of words.
Examples: SG I: pp. 27-28, 35-36, 139 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 27-28, 35-36; Unit 3: Predicting, p. 139 SG II: pp. 76, 147, 162, 218 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, p. 76; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 147, 162; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 218 Assessment masters: Examples on pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 43-44, 51-52, 59-60
ELA6R3 The student reads aloud, accurately (in the range of 95%), familiar material in a variety of genres, in a way that makes meaning clear to listeners. The student
Grade 6 Page 8 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
a. Uses letter-sound knowledge to decode written English and uses a range of cueing systems (e.g., phonics and context clues) to determine pronunciation and meaning.
Examples: SG I: pp. 20-21, 50-51, 76-77, 91-92, 106-107, 120-121 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 20-21, 50-51; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 76-77, 91-92, 106-107; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 120-121 SG II: pp. 35-36, 64-65, 120-121, 132-133, 218-219 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 35-36; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121, 132-133; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 218-219 Assessment Masters: pp. 19, 28, 35-36, 51-52, 67-68
b. Uses self-correction when subsequent reading indicates an earlier miscue (self-monitoring and self-correcting strategies).
Students complete multiple activities dealing with any given reading, allowing them to revisit the reading material and clarify their analysis. In particular, predicting and inferencing activities encourage students to skim or quickly read passages, make predictions or analyze the reading, then reread for accuracy. See: SG I: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 SG II: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 53-57, 93-97, 101-105
Grade 6 Page 9 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
c. Reads with a rhythm, flow, and meter that sounds like everyday speech (prosody).
Explicit instruction in oral reading fluency to improve reading achievement is included throughout the AMP program. See for example, instruction on: • Relaxed reading (SG II: pp. 16, 22, 34, 37, 49, 80, 105, 145,1750 • Breathing (SG II: pp. 18, 90, 128, 137, 220) • Pace (SG I: pp. 48-49, 52, 55, 104-105, 145; SG II: pp. 24, 48, 98, 166- 167, 207, 214, 216-217, 220, 222-223) • Natural breathing (SG I: pp. 72, 74-75) Students reread, in pairs or in groups, each of the passages in the Student Guides and are guided to carry out their daily independent reading fluently. Through teacher modeling, direct instruction, and tips, students focus on each of the aspects of fluency in each Student Guide unit. A Fluency tip appears with each passage in the Student Guide and is elaborated on in the Teacher’s Edition with suggestions for instruction, modeling, and practice. In addition, with the AMP Reading Online Library, students can repeatedly hear and read along with models of fluent reading.
ELA6RC1 Reading Across the Curriculum The student reads a minimum of 25 grade-level appropriate books or book equivalents (approximately 1,000,000 words) per year from a variety of subject disciplines. The student reads both informational and fictional texts in a variety of genres and modes of discourse, including technical texts related to various subject areas.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books that correspond to the seven Student Guide units. Each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. Eighty-five percent of the selections are nonfiction. AMP Reading System Level II includes the following: • “Animal Tricks and Treks” (biology, geography, sociology) • “To the Rescue” (social studies, history, science) • “Blast Off!” (science, history) • “Living Your Dream” (fiction, biography, social studies) • “How Did They Do That?” (physics, engineering, history) • “Most Embarrassing Moments” (fiction, biography, history, sports) • “Great Goofs” (history, sports, science, literature, media) In addition, Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
Grade 6 Page 10 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
The student participates in discussions related to curricular learning in all subject areas. The student
a. Identifies messages and themes from books in all subject areas.
SG I: pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 47-49, 52-55 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 47-49, 52-55 SG II: p. 179 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 13-16
ELA6RC2
b. Responds to a variety of texts in multiple modes of discourse.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books that correspond to the seven Student Guide units. Each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. Eighty-five percent of the selections are nonfiction. AMP Reading System Level II includes the following: • “Animal Tricks and Treks” (biology, geography, sociology) • “To the Rescue” (social studies, history, science) • “Blast Off!” (science, history) • “Living Your Dream” (fiction, biography, social studies) • “How Did They Do That?” (physics, engineering, history) • “Most Embarrassing Moments” (fiction, biography, history, sports) • “Great Goofs” (history, sports, science, literature, media) Students respond to these texts by summarizing, questioning, predicting, analyzing structure, visualizing, inferencing, and applying Metacognition skills. In addition, Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
Grade 6 Page 11 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
c. Relates messages and themes from one subject area to those in another area.
In several units, students relate information from their own experience to the subject of the text they are reading to enhance their understanding of messages and themes. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 31, 34, 75, 87, 99, 116, 125, 134, 140 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, p. 31, 34; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 75, 87, 99; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 116, 125, 134, 140 SG I: pp. 14, 19, 28, 130, 138, 165 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 14, 19, 28; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 130, 138, 165 Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts also aid students in relating readings to social studies, science, and math.
d. Evaluates the merits of texts in every subject discipline.
Students assess the merits and relevance of a wide range of texts and apply ideas from them in “After You Read” prompts throughout. See examples: SG I: pp. 34, 37, 40, 43, 46, 49, 52, 55, 60, 63, 72 SG II: pp. 10, 13, 25, 31, 34, 40, 43, 49, 55, 63, 69
e. Examines the author’s purpose in writing. Examples: SG I: pp. 17-19, 103-105, 108-111 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 17-19; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 103-105, 108- 111 SG II: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 38-40, 41-43 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 11-13, 17-19, 38-40, 41-43 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-17, 61-65, 69-73 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 27-31
f. Recognizes and uses the features of disciplinary texts (e.g., charts, graphs, photos, maps, highlighted vocabulary).
Examples: SG I: pp. 82, 117, 135, 138 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 82; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117, 135, 138 SG II: pp. 61-63, 66, 97-98, 108, 110 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 61-63, 66, 97-98, 108, 110 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp.32-36
Grade 6 Page 12 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
The student acquires new vocabulary in each content area and uses it correctly. The student
a. Demonstrates an understanding of contextual vocabulary in various subjects.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level II. Customized Reading Stratgies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary exercises analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 39-40, 43-44
b. Uses content vocabulary in writing and speaking.
In vocabulary lessons throughout, students write their own sentences using or responding to vocabulary words. See examples: SG I: pp. 51, 65, 77, 107, 121, 127, 133, 142 SG II: pp. 36, 51, 59, 65, 71, 92, 101, 107, 115 Additionally, teaching tips in the TE encourage teachers to have students collaborate on ideas for writing sentences and to volunteer and discuss their sentences. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 3, 9, 21, 30, 45 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 3, 9, 21, 30, 45
ELA6RC3
c. Explores understanding of new words found in subject area texts.
SG I/II: Vocabulary exercises throughout the Student Guides focus on words that are found in the subject area reading assignments. In addition to previously noted strategies, students also explore synonyms and antonyms, how prefixes and suffixes change a base word, parts of speech, analogies, shades of meaning, word families, word origins, idioms, connotation and denotation, and so on. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78, 106-109 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52; Unit II: Questioning, pp. 64- 66, 76-78, 106-109 SG II: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-66, 76-78 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10
Grade 6 Page 13 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
The student establishes a context for information acquired by reading across subject areas. The student
a. Explores life experiences related to subject area content.
“After You Read” and “Beyond the Text” questions help students relate personal life experiences to the subject area content. See examples: SG I: pp. 34, 55, 75, 87, 93, 125 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 34, 55; Unit 2: Questioning: pp. 75, 87, 93; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 125 SG II: pp. 7, 13, 19, 252, 43, 55, 128, 140, 143 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 7, 13, 19, 25, 43, 55; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 128, 140,143
b. Discusses in both writing and speaking how certain words and concepts relate to multiple subjects.
Many of the reading materials apply one idea to several subjects. For example, information in “Animal Tricks and Treks” (Unit 1: Summarizing) is related to biology, geography, sociology, and media. Likewise, information in the reader “How Did They Do That?” (Unit 5: Visualizing) is related to engineering, history, and space technology.
ELA6RC4
c. Determines strategies for finding content and contextual meaning for unfamiliar words or concepts.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level II. Customized Reading Stratgies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary words exercises analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 39-40, 43-44
Grade 6 Page 14 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
Writing The student produces writing that establishes an appropriate organizational structure, sets a context and engages the reader, maintains a coherent focus throughout, and provides a satisfying closure. The student
a. Selects a focus, an organizational structure, and a point of view based on purpose, genre expectations, audience, length, and format requirements.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
b. Writes texts of a length appropriate to address the topic or tell the story.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Uses traditional structures for conveying information (e.g., chronological order, cause and effect, similarity and difference, and posing and answering a question).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
ELA6W1
d. Uses appropriate structures to ensure coherence (e.g., transition elements).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-G; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-230
The student demonstrates competence in a variety of genres.
ELA6W2
The student produces a narrative (fictional, personal) that:
Grade 6 Page 15 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
a. Engages readers by establishing and developing a plot, setting, and point of view that are appropriate to the story (e.g., varied beginnings, standard plot line, cohesive devices).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G
b. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Includes sensory details and concrete language to develop plot, setting, and character (e.g., vivid verbs, descriptive adjectives, and varied sentence structures).
The use of sensory words in covered in: SG II, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109-111, 206-208 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109-111; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 206-208
d. Uses a range of strategies (e.g., suspense, figurative language, dialogue, expanded vocabulary, movement, gestures, expressions).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Excludes extraneous details and inconsistencies. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Provides a sense of closure appropriate to the writing.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F
The student produces writing (multi-paragraph expository composition such as description, explanation, comparison and contrast, or problem and solution) that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Establishes a statement as the main idea or topic sentence.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Grade 6 Page 16 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
c. Develops a controlling idea that conveys a perspective on the subject.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
d. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
e. Develops the topic with supporting details. TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
f. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226
g. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
h. Concludes with a detailed summary linked to the purpose of the composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
The student produces technical writing (friendly letters, thank-you notes, formula poems, instructions) that:
a. Creates or follows an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Applies rules of Standard English. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 6 Page 17 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
The student produces a response to literature that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Demonstrates an understanding of the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Advances a judgment that is interpretive, analytic, evaluative, or reflective.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Organizes an interpretation around several clear ideas, premises, or images.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Supports a judgment through references to the text.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a multi-paragraph persuasive essay that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. States a clear position of a proposition or proposal.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Supports the position with organized and relevant evidence.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 6 Page 18 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
d. Excludes information and arguments that are irrelevant.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to a specific purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Anticipates and addresses readers’ concerns and counter-arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student uses research and technology to support writing. The student
a. Uses organizational features of electronic text (e.g., bulletin boards, databases, keyword searches, e-mail addresses) to locate relevant information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Includes researched information in different types of products (e.g., compositions, multimedia presentations, graphic organizers, projects, etc.).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA6W3
c. Cites references. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student consistently uses the writing process to develop, revise, and evaluate writing. The student
ELA6W4
a. Plans and drafts independently and resourcefully.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112CF; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Grade 6 Page 19 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
b. Revises manuscripts to improve the organization and consistency of ideas within and between paragraphs.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Edits to correct errors in spelling, punctuation, etc.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Conventions The student demonstrates understanding and control of the rules of the English language, realizing that usage involves the appropriate application of conventions and grammar in both written and spoken formats. The student
ELA6C1
a. Identifies and uses the eight basic parts of speech and demonstrates that words can be different parts of speech within a sentence.
i. Identifies and uses nouns – abstract, common, collective, plural, and possessive.
ii. Identifies and uses pronouns – personal, possessive, interrogative, demonstrative, reflexive, and indefinite.
iii. Identifies and uses adjectives – common, proper, and demonstrative.
iv. Identifies and uses verbs – action (transitive/intransitive), linking, and state-of-being.
v. Identifies and uses verb phrases – main verbs and helping verbs.
vi. Identifies and uses adverbs.
SG I: p. 106 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, p. 106
SG I: p. 106 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, p. 106
Grade 6 Page 20 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
vii. Identifies and uses prepositional phrases (preposition, object of the preposition, and any of its modifiers).
viii. Identifies and uses conjunctions – coordinating, correlative, and common subordinating.
ix. Identifies and uses interjections.
TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 112E-G TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56E-F; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 172-174 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
b. Recognizes basic parts of a sentence (subject, verb, direct object, indirect object, predicate noun, predicate adjective).
TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 56C-F; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
c. Identifies and writes simple, compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences, avoiding fragments and run-ons.
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56C-E; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-172 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
d. Demonstrates appropriate comma and semicolon usage (compound and complex sentences, appositives, words in direct address).
TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 172-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
e. Uses common spelling rules, applies common spelling patterns, and develops and masters words that are commonly misspelled.
Spelling rules are built in to vocabulary worksheets, particularly those that focus on affixes and homophones. See examples: SG I: pp. 8-9, 50-51, 64-65, 91-92, 132-133 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 8-9, 50-51; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 64-65, 91- 92; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 132-133 SG II: pp. 64-65, 120-121 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121
Grade 6 Page 21 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
f. Produces final drafts that demonstrate accurate spelling and the correct use of punctuation and capitalization.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Listening/Speaking/Viewing
The student participates in student-to-teacher, student-to-student, and group verbal interactions. The student
a. Initiates new topics in addition to responding to adult-initiated topics.
Many oral language activities throughout TE I/II encourage student-initiated topics, particularly “After Students Read” sections. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 10, 13, 25, 49, 52 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 7, 13, 43, 55
b. Asks relevant questions. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Responds to questions with appropriate information.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 67, 68, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83
d. Confirms understanding by paraphrasing the adult’s directions or suggestions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Displays appropriate turn-taking behaviors. Students take turns with partners or in small groups to read aloud, analyze, discuss, etc. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 116, 118, 124, 130, 134, 136, 145, 146, 154
f. Actively solicits another person’s comments or opinions.
Students are directed to discuss readings, interpretations, predictions, and so on. Such discussion implies soliciting and considering another’s comments and opinions. See examples: TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 122, 125, 129, 141, 143, 147, 158, 161, 164
ELA6LSV1
g. Offers own opinion forcefully without being domineering.
Students have many opportunities to share their opinions in the course of class discussion. See examples: TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117, 125, 146, 149, 150, 161; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 175, 196
Grade 6 Page 22 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
h. Responds appropriately to comments and questions.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 67, 68, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83
i. Volunteers contributions and responds when directly solicited by teacher or discussion leader.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 67, 68, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83
j. Gives reasons in support of opinions expressed. Throughout TE I/II. See examples: SG I/TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 125, 129, 135, 136, 138, 140 SG II/TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117, 119, 122, 125, 134, 135
k. Clarifies, illustrates, or expands on a response when asked to do so.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: SG I/TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 67, 73, 99, 111 SG II/TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 66, 67, 69, 72, 75
l. Employs a group decision-making technique such as brainstorming or a problem-solving sequence (e.g., recognizes problem, defines problem, identifies possible solutions, selects optimal solution, implements solution, evaluates solution).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
m. Writes a response to/reflection of interactions with others.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student listens to and views various forms of text and media in order to gather and share information, persuade others, and express and understand ideas. The student will select and critically analyze messages using rubrics as assessment tools.
ELA6LSV2
When responding to visual and oral texts and media (e.g., television, radio, film productions, and electronic media), the student:
Grade 6 Page 23 of 80
Standard (Cite
Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
a. Identifies persuasive and propaganda techniques used in media and identifies false and misleading information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Identifies the tone, mood, and emotion conveyed in the oral communication.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
When delivering or responding to presentations, the student:
a. Gives oral presentations or dramatic interpretations for various purposes.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Shows appropriate changes in delivery (e.g., gestures, vocabulary, pace, visuals).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Uses language for dramatic effect. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Uses rubrics as assessment tools. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Uses electronic media for presentations. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
CORRELATION TO THE GEORGIA PERFORMANCE STANDARDS Subject Area: Language Arts State-Funded Course: Language Arts/Grade 7 Textbook Title: AMP Reading System, Level II (Green) Publisher: Pearson Education
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
Reading and Literature
ELA7R1 The student demonstrates comprehension and shows evidence of a warranted and responsible explanation of a variety of literary and informational texts.
For literary texts, the student identifies the characteristics of various genres and produces evidence of reading that:
a. Distinguishes between the concepts of theme in a literary work and the author’s purpose in an expository text.
Throughout the AMP program, students preview, discuss, and review author purpose and theme. See examples: SG I: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 159-161 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 17-19; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 159-161 SG II: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 38-40, 117-119, 153-155 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 11-13, 17-19, 38-40; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 153-155 Assessment Masters: pp. 21-25, 69-73
b. Interprets a character’s traits, emotions, or motivations and gives supporting evidence from a text.
SG II: pp. 135-136 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 135-136 Assessment Masters: pp. 101-105
c. Relates a literary work to information about its setting or historical moment.
SG I: pp. 83, 109, 110, 124, 130, 139, 144, 153, 154, 160, 165, 166 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 83, 109, 110; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 124, 130, 139, 144, 153, 154, 160, 165, 166 SG II: pp. 83, 95, 97, 98, 104, 138, 139, 154, 207, 210, 216 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 83, 95, 97, 98, 104; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 138, 139, 154; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 207, 210, 216 Assessment Masters: pp. 29-33, 50, 61-65, 101-106, 109-114
Grade 7 Page 24 of 80
d. Analyzes recurring and similar themes across a variety of selections, distinguishing theme from topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Identifies events that advance the plot and determines how each event explains past or present action(s) or foreshadows future action(s).
SG I: pp. 135-137 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 135-137 SG II: pp. 122-123, 134-137 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 122-123, 134-137 Assessment Masters, pp. 45-49, 93-97
f. Analyzes characterization (dynamic and static) in prose and plays as delineated through a character’s thoughts, words, speech patterns, and actions; the narrator’s description; and the thoughts, words, and actions of other characters.
SG I: pp. 95, 160 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, p. 95; Unit 3: Prediction, p. 160 SG II: pp. 4, 19, 123, 125, 128, 131, 134, 136, 137 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 19; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 123, 125, 1238, 131, 134, 136, 137 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 93-97
g. Explains and analyzes the effects of sound, form, figurative language, and graphics in order to uncover meaning in literature: i. Sound (e.g., alliteration, onomatopoeia, internal rhyme, rhyme scheme) ii. Figurative language (e.g., simile, metaphor, personification, and hyperbole) iii. Graphics (e.g., capital letters, line length, word position).
SG I: pp. 136, 138 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 136, 138
h. Identifies and analyzes how an author’s use of words creates tone and mood, giving supporting evidence from text.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Identifies and analyzes similarities and differences in traditional literature from different cultures.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
For informational texts, the student reads and comprehends in order to develop understanding and expertise and produces evidence of reading that:
Grade 7 Page 25 of 80
a. Analyzes common textual features to obtain information (e.g., paragraphs, topic sentences, concluding sentences, introduction, conclusion, footnotes, index, bibliography).
Examples: SG I: pp. 5-7, 10-12, 17-18, 24, 26-27, 41-43, 46-47, 49, 52-55; Glossary pp. 169-172 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 5-7, 10-12, 17-18, 24, 26-27, 41-43, 46-47, 49, 52-55 SG II: pp. 173, 175, 178, 185-186, 191, 193; Glossary pp. 225-229 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 173, 175, 178, 185-186, 191, 193 Assessment Masters: pp. 16, 23 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45; Math, pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45
b. Identifies and uses knowledge of common graphic features to draw conclusions and make judgments (e.g., graphic organizers, diagrams, captions, illustrations).
Examples: SG I: pp. 53, 61, 62, 117, 138, 136, 138, 165; TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, p. 53; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 61, 62, 117; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 136, 138, 165; Blackline Masters, pp. 179, 181, 183 SG II: pp. 61, 94, 97, 103, 108, 109, 110, 202, 205 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 61, 94, 97, 103, 108, 109, 110; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 202, 205; Blackline Masters, pp. 231-243 Assessment Masters: pp. 24, 80, 89, 121 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 31, 46-48; Math pp. 30, 41-43
c. Applies knowledge of common organizational structures and patterns (i.e., logical order, cause and effect relationships, comparison and contrast, transitions).
Examples: SG II: pp. 38-39, 41-43, 46-47, 49, 52, 94, 103-105, 153-155, 158, 165, 200 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 38-39, 51-53, 56-57, 59, 52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 94, 103-105; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 153-155, 158, 165; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 200; Blackline Masters, pp. 234-237 Assessment Masters: pp. 61-65, 69-73
d. Recognizes and traces the development of the author’s argument for and against an issue.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Identifies evidence used to support an argument.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Understands and explains the use of a simple device by following technical directions.
TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-168D
Grade 7 Page 26 of 80
ELA7R2 The student understands and acquires new vocabulary and uses it correctly in reading and writing. The student
a. Determines the meaning of unfamiliar words using context clues (e.g., contrast, cause and effect, etc.).
SG I: pp. 20-21, 106-107, 120-121 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 20-21; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 106-107; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 120-121 SG II: pp. 35-36, 132-133, 218-219 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 35-36; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 132-133; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 218-219 In addition, in vocabulary exercises throughout, students use context to determine word choice. Assessment Masters: Vocabulary Assessments throughout. Examples on pp. 11- 12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 43-44, 51-52 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp 8-10
b. Uses knowledge of Greek, Latin, and Anglo-Saxon roots and affixes to determine the meaning of unfamiliar words.
SG I: pp. 8-9, 50-51, 64-65, 76-77, 132-133, 147-148 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 8-9, 50-51; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 64-65, 76- 77; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 132-133, 147-148 SG II: pp. 8-9, 64-65, 106-107, 120-121 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-9; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65, 106-107; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121 Assessment Masters: Examples on pp. 20, 28, 52, 100 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: p. 10
c. Identifies and explains idioms and analogies in prose and poetry.
SG I: pp. 35-36 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 35-36 SG II: pp. 203-204 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 203-204 Assessment Masters: p. 20
Grade 7 Page 27 of 80
d. Determines word meanings through the use of definition, example, restatement, or contrast.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees an example of it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level II. Examples: SG I: pp. 2-3, 8-9, 14-15, 20-21 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 2-3, 8-9, 14-15, 20-21 SG II: pp. 2-3, 8-9, 14-15, 20-21 TE I: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 2-3, 8-9, 14-15, 20-21 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: See examples on pp. 11, 19, 27, 35, 43, 51, 59, 67, 75, 83, 91, 99, 107, 115
ELA7R3 The student reads aloud, accurately (in the range of 95%), familiar material in a variety of genres, in a way that makes meaning clear to listeners. The student
a. Uses letter-sound knowledge to decode written English and uses a range of cueing systems (e.g., phonics and context clues) to determine pronunciation and meaning.
Examples: SG I: pp. 20-21, 50-51, 76-77, 91-92, 106-107, 120-121 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 20-21, 50-51; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 76-77, 91-92, 106-107; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 120-121 SG II: pp. 35-36, 64-65, 120-121, 132-133, 218-219 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 35-36; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121, 132-133; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 218-219 Assessment Masters: pp. 19, 28, 35-36, 51-52, 67-68
b. Uses self-correction when subsequent reading indicates an earlier miscue (self-monitoring and self-correcting strategies).
Students complete multiple activities dealing with any given reading, allowing them to revisit the reading material and clarify their analysis. In particular, predicting and inferencing activities encourage students to skim or quickly read passages, make predictions or analyze the reading, then reread for accuracy. See: SG I: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 SG II: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 53-57, 93-97, 101-105
Grade 7 Page 28 of 80
c. Reads with a rhythm, flow, and meter that sounds like everyday speech (prosody).
Explicit instruction in oral reading fluency to improve reading achievement is included throughout the AMP program. See for example, instruction on: • Relaxed reading (SG II: pp. 16, 22, 34, 37, 49, 80, 105, 145,1750 • Breathing (SG II: pp. 18, 90, 128, 137, 220) • Pace (SG I: pp. 48-49, 52, 55, 104-105, 145; SG II: pp. 24, 48, 98, 166- 167, 207, 214, 216-217, 220, 222-223) • Natural breathing (SG I: pp. 72, 74-75) Students reread, in pairs or in groups, each of the passages in the Student Guides and are guided to carry out their daily independent reading fluently. Through teacher modeling, direct instruction, and tips, students focus on each of the aspects of fluency in each Student Guide unit. A Fluency tip appears with each passage in the Student Guide and is elaborated on in the Teacher’s Edition with suggestions for instruction, modeling, and practice. In addition, with the AMP Reading Online Library, students can repeatedly hear and read along with models of fluent reading.
Reading Across the Curriculum
ELA7RC1 The student reads a minimum of 25 grade-level appropriate books or book equivalents (approximately 1,000,000 words) per year from a variety of subject disciplines. The student reads both informational and fictional texts in a variety of genres and modes of discourse, including technical texts related to various subject areas.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books that correspond to the seven Student Guide units. Each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. Eighty-five percent of the selections are nonfiction. AMP Reading System Level II includes the following: • “Animal Tricks and Treks” (biology, geography, sociology) • “To the Rescue” (social studies, history, science) • “Blast Off!” (science, history) • “Living Your Dream” (fiction, biography, social studies) • “How Did They Do That?” (physics, engineering, history) • “Most Embarrassing Moments” (fiction, biography, history, sports) • “Great Goofs” (history, sports, science, literature, media) In addition, Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
Grade 7 Page 29 of 80
ELA7RC2 The student participates in discussions related to curricular learning in all subject areas. The student
a. Identifies messages and themes from books in all subject areas.
SG I: pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 47-49, 52-55 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 47-49, 52-55 SG II: p. 179 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 13-16
b. Responds to a variety of texts in multiple modes of discourse.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books that correspond to the seven Student Guide units. Each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. Eighty-five percent of the selections are nonfiction. AMP Reading System Level II includes the following: • “Animal Tricks and Treks” (biology, geography, sociology) • “To the Rescue” (social studies, history, science) • “Blast Off!” (science, history) • “Living Your Dream” (fiction, biography, social studies) • “How Did They Do That?” (physics, engineering, history) • “Most Embarrassing Moments” (fiction, biography, history, sports) • “Great Goofs” (history, sports, science, literature, media) Students respond to these texts by summarizing, questioning, predicting, analyzing structure, visualizing, inferencing, and applying Metacognition skills. In addition, Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
Grade 7 Page 30 of 80
c. Relates messages and themes from one subject area to those in another area.
In several units, students relate information from their own experience to the subject of the text they are reading to enhance their understanding of messages and themes. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 31, 34, 75, 87, 99, 116, 125, 134, 140 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, p. 31, 34; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 75, 87, 99; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 116, 125, 134, 140 SG I: pp. 14, 19, 28, 130, 138, 165 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 14, 19, 28; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 130, 138, 165 Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts also aid students in relating readings to social studies, science, and math.
d. Evaluates the merits of texts in every subject discipline.
Students assess the merits and relevance of a wide range of texts and apply ideas from them in “After You Read” prompts throughout. See examples: SG I: pp. 34, 37, 40, 43, 46, 49, 52, 55, 60, 63, 72 SG II: pp. 10, 13, 25, 31, 34, 40, 43, 49, 55, 63, 69
e. Examines the author’s purpose in writing. Examples: SG I: pp. 17-19, 103-105, 108-111 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 17-19; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 103-105, 108- 111 SG II: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 38-40, 41-43 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 11-13, 17-19, 38-40, 41-43 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-17, 61-65, 69-73 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 27-31
f. Recognizes and uses the features of disciplinary texts (e.g., charts, graphs, photos, maps, highlighted vocabulary).
Examples: SG I: pp. 82, 117, 135, 138 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 82; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117, 135, 138 SG II: pp. 61-63, 66, 97-98, 108, 110 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 61-63, 66, 97-98, 108, 110 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp.32-36
Grade 7 Page 31 of 80
ELA7RC3 The student acquires new vocabulary in each content area and uses it correctly. The student
a. Demonstrates an understanding of contextual vocabulary in various subjects.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level II. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary exercises analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 39-40, 43-44
b. Uses content vocabulary in writing and speaking.
In vocabulary lessons throughout, students write their own sentences using or responding to vocabulary words. See examples: SG I: pp. 51, 65, 77, 107, 121, 127, 133, 142 SG II: pp. 36, 51, 59, 65, 71, 92, 101, 107, 115 Additionally, teaching tips in the TE encourage teachers to have students collaborate on ideas for writing sentences and to volunteer and discuss their sentences. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 3, 9, 21, 30, 45 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 3, 9, 21, 30, 45
c. Explores understanding of new words found in subject area texts.
SG I/II: Vocabulary exercises throughout the Student Guides focus on words that are found in the subject area reading assignments. In addition to previously noted strategies, students also explore synonyms and antonyms, how prefixes and suffixes change a base word, parts of speech, analogies, shades of meaning, word families, word origins, idioms, connotation and denotation, and so on. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78, 106-109 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52; Unit II: Questioning, pp. 64- 66, 76-78, 106-109 SG II: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-66, 76-78 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10
Grade 7 Page 32 of 80
ELA7RC4 The student establishes a context for information acquired by reading across subject areas. The student
a. Explores life experiences related to subject area content.
“After You Read” and “Beyond the Text” questions help students relate personal life experiences to the subject area content. See examples: SG I: pp. 34, 55, 75, 87, 93, 125 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 34, 55; Unit 2: Questioning: pp. 75, 87, 93; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 125 SG II: pp. 7, 13, 19, 252, 43, 55, 128, 140, 143 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 7, 13, 19, 25, 43, 55; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 128, 140,143
b. Discusses in both writing and speaking how certain words and concepts relate to multiple subjects.
Many of the reading materials apply one idea to several subjects. For example, information in “Animal Tricks and Treks” (Unit 1: Summarizing) is related to biology, geography, sociology, and media. Likewise, information in the reader “How Did They Do That?” (Unit 5: Visualizing) is related to engineering, history, and space technology.
c. Determines strategies for finding content and contextual meaning for unfamiliar words or concepts.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level II. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary words exercises analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 39-40, 43-44
Writing
The student writes clear, coherent text that develops a central idea or tells a story. The writing shows consideration of the audience and purpose. The student progresses through the stages of the writing process (e.g., prewriting, drafting, revising, and editing successive versions).
Grade 7 Page 33 of 80
ELA7W1 The student produces writing that establishes an appropriate organizational structure, sets a context and engages the reader, maintains a coherent focus throughout, and provides a satisfying closure. The student
a. Selects a focus, an organizational structure, and a point of view based on purpose, genre expectations, audience, length, and format requirements.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
b. Writes texts of a length appropriate to address the topic or tell the story.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Uses traditional structures for conveying information (e.g., chronological order, cause and effect, similarity and difference, and posing and answering a question).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
d. Uses appropriate structures to ensure coherence (e.g., transition elements).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-G; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-230
e. Supports statements and claims with anecdotes, descriptions, facts and statistics, and specific examples.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
ELA7W2 The student demonstrates competence in a variety of genres.
The student produces a narrative (fictional, personal, experiential) that:
a. Engages readers by establishing and developing a plot, setting, and point of view that are appropriate to the story (e.g., varied beginnings, standard plot line, cohesive devices, and a sharpened focus).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G
b. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
Grade 7 Page 34 of 80
c. Develops characters using standard methods of characterization.
d. Includes sensory details and concrete language to develop plot, setting, and character (e.g., vivid verbs, descriptive adjectives, and varied sentence structures).
The use of sensory words in covered in: SG II, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109-111, 206-208 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109-111; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 206-208
e. Excludes extraneous details and inconsistencies.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Uses a range of strategies (e.g., suspense, figurative language, dialogue, expanded vocabulary, flashback, movement, gestures, expressions, tone, and mood).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F
The student produces writing (multi-paragraph expository composition such as description, explanation, comparison and contrast, or problem and solution) that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Develops a controlling idea that conveys a perspective on the subject.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
d. Develops the topic with supporting details. TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
e. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226
f. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
Grade 7 Page 35 of 80
g. Concludes with a detailed summary linked to the purpose of the composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
The student produces technical writing (business correspondence: memoranda, emails, letters of inquiry, letters of complaint, instructions and procedures, lab reports, slide presentations) that:
a. Creates or follows an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Applies rules of Standard English. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a response to literature that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, or otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Demonstrates an understanding of the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Organizes an interpretation around several clear ideas, premises, or images from the original work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Supports a judgment through references to the text and personal knowledge.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Justifies interpretations through sustained use of examples and textual evidence from the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 36 of 80
The student produces a multi-paragraph persuasive essay that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. States a clear position or perspective in support of a proposition or proposal.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Describes the points in support of the proposition, employing well-articulated, relevant evidence.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Excludes information and arguments that are irrelevant.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to a specific purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Anticipates and addresses readers’ concerns and counter-arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA7W3 The student uses research and technology to support writing. The student
a. Identifies topics, asks and evaluates questions, and develops ideas leading to inquiry, investigation, and research.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Gives credit for both quoted and paraphrased information in a bibliography by using a consistent and sanctioned format and methodology for citations.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Includes researched information in different types of products (e.g., compositions, multimedia presentations, graphic organizers, projects, etc.).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 37 of 80
d. Documents sources. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Uses electronic media to locate relevant information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA7W4 The student consistently uses the writing process to develop, revise, and evaluate writing. The student
a. Plans and drafts independently and resourcefully.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112CF; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Uses strategies of note taking, outlining, and summarizing to impose structure on composition drafts.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Revises manuscripts to improve the organization and consistency of ideas within and between paragraphs.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
d. Edits writing to improve word choice after checking the precision of the vocabulary.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Conventions
ELA7C1 The student demonstrates understanding and control of the rules of the English language, realizing that usage involves the appropriate application of conventions and grammar in both written and spoken formats. The student
a. Identifies and writes simple, compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences correctly, punctuating properly, avoiding fragments and run-ons, adding or deleting modifiers, combining or revising sentences.
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56C-E; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
b. Identifies and writes correctly punctuated adjective and adverb clauses.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Uses standard subject-verb and pronoun-antecedent agreement.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 38 of 80
d. Identifies and uses verb tenses consistently (simple and perfect).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Demonstrates correct usage of comparative and superlative forms of adjectives and adverbs.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Demonstrates appropriate comma and semicolon usage (compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences, and split dialogue).
TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 172-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
g. Distinguishes differences in meaning and spelling of commonly confused homonyms.
SG I: 91-92 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 91-92
h. Produces final drafts/presentations that demonstrate accurate spelling and the correct use of punctuation and capitalization.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Listening/Speaking/Viewing
ELA7LSV1 The student participates in student-to-teacher, student-to-student, and group verbal interactions. The student
a. Initiates new topics in addition to responding to adult-initiated topics.
Many oral language activities throughout TE I/II encourage student-initiated topics, particularly “After Students Read” sections. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 10, 13, 25, 49, 52 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 7, 13, 43, 55
b. Asks relevant questions. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Responds to questions with appropriate information.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 67, 68, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83
d. Confirms understanding by paraphrasing the adult’s directions or suggestions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Displays appropriate turn-taking behaviors. Students take turns with partners or in small groups to read aloud, analyze, discuss, etc. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 116, 118, 124, 130, 134, 136, 145, 146, 154
Grade 7 Page 39 of 80
f. Actively solicits another person’s comments or opinions.
Students are directed to discuss readings, interpretations, predictions, and so on. Such discussion implies soliciting and considering another’s comments and opinions. See examples: TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 122, 125, 129, 141, 143, 147, 158, 161, 164
g. Offers own opinion forcefully without domineering.
Students have many opportunities to share their opinions in the course of class discussion. See examples: TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117, 125, 146, 149, 150, 161; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 175, 196
h. Responds appropriately to comments and questions.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 67, 68, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83
i. Volunteers contributions and responds when directly solicited by teacher or discussion leader.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 67, 68, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83
j. Gives reasons in support of opinions expressed.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: SG I/TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 125, 129, 135, 136, 138, 140 SG II/TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117, 119, 122, 125, 134, 135
k. Clarifies, illustrates, or expands on a response when asked to do so.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: SG I/TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 67, 73, 99, 111 SG II/TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 66, 67, 69, 72, 75
l. Employs a group decision-making technique such as brainstorming or a problem solving sequence (e.g., recognizes problem, defines problem, identifies possible solutions, selects optimal solution, implements solution, evaluates solution).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
m. Develops an outline that highlights the important issues discussed.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA7LSV2 The student listens to and views various forms of text and media in order to gather and share information, persuade others, and express and understand ideas. The student will select and critically analyze messages using rubrics as assessment tools.
Grade 7 Page 40 of 80
Grade 7 Page 41 of 80
When responding to visual and oral texts and media (e.g., television, radio, film productions, and electronic media), the student:
a. Analyzes the effect on the viewer of image, text, and sound in electronic journalism.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Identifies the techniques used to achieve the effects studied in each instance. When delivering and responding to presentations, the student:
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
When delivering or responding to presentations, the student:
a. Gives oral presentations or dramatic interpretations for various purposes.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Organizes information to achieve particular purposes and to appeal to the background and interests of the audience.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Shows appropriate changes in delivery (e.g., gestures, vocabulary, pace, visuals).
SG I: pp. 10, 37, 39-40, 42-43, 49, 85, 99, 104, 108 TE I: Unit 1, pp. 10, 37, 39-40, 42-43, 49; Unit 2, Questioning, pp. 85, 99, 104, SG II: pp. 6, 7, 10, 19, 28, 33, 34, 42, 43, 54, 105, 108, 111, 134, 137 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 6, 7, 10, 19, 28, 33, 34, 42, 43, 54; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 105, 108, 111; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 134, 137
d. Uses language for dramatic effect. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Uses rubrics as assessment tools. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Responds to oral communications with questions, challenges, or affirmations.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Uses multimedia in presentations. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
CORRELATION TO THE GEORGIA PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
Subject Area: Language Arts State-Funded Course: Language Arts/Grade 8 Textbook Title: AMP Reading System, Level II (Green)____________________________ Publisher: Pearson _____________
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
Reading and Literature
ELA8R1 The student demonstrates comprehension and shows evidence of a warranted and responsible explanation of a variety of literary and informational texts.
For literary texts, the student identifies the characteristics of various genres and produces evidence of reading that:
a. Identifies the difference between the concepts of theme in a literary work and author’s purpose in an expository text.
Throughout the AMP program, students preview, discuss, and review author purpose and theme. See examples: SG I: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 159-161 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 17-19; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 159-161 SG II: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 38-40, 117-119, 153-155 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 11-13, 17-19, 38-40; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 153-155 Assessment Masters: pp. 21-25, 69-73
b. Compares and contrasts genre characteristics from two or more selections of literature.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Analyzes a character’s traits, emotions, or motivations and gives supporting evidence from the text(s).
SG II: pp. 135-136 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 135-136 Assessment Masters: pp. 101-105
Grade 7 Page 42 of 80
d. Compares and contrasts motivations and reactions of literary characters from different historical eras confronting similar situations or conflicts.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Evaluates recurring or similar themes across a variety of selections, distinguishing theme from topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Evaluates the structural elements of the plot (e.g., subplots, climax), the plot’s development, and the way in which conflicts are (or are not) addressed and resolved.
SG I: pp. 135-137 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 135-137 SG II: pp. 122-123, 134-137 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 122-123, 134-137 Assessment Masters, pp. 45-49, 93-97
g. Analyzes and evaluates the effects of sound, form, figurative language, and graphics in order to uncover meaning in literature:
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Sound (e.g., alliteration, onomatopoeia, internal rhyme, rhyme scheme, meter)
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ii. Figurative language (e.g., simile, metaphor, personification, hyperbole, symbolism, imagery).
SG II: pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109-111, 206-208 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109-111; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 206-208 Assessment Masters: pp. 80, 88, 120
h. Analyzes and evaluates how an author’s use of words creates tone and mood and provides supporting details from text.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
For informational texts, the student reads and comprehends in order to develop understanding and expertise and produces evidence of reading that:
Grade 7 Page 43 of 80
a. Analyzes and evaluates common textual features (e.g., paragraphs, topic sentences, concluding sentences, introduction, conclusion, footnotes, index, bibliography).
Examples: SG I: pp. 5-7, 10-12, 17-18, 24, 26-27, 41-43, 46-47, 49, 52-55; Glossary pp. 169-172 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 5-7, 10-12, 17-18, 24, 26-27, 41-43, 46-47, 49, 52-55 SG II: pp. 173, 175, 178, 185-186, 191, 193; Glossary pp. 225-229 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 173, 175, 178, 185-186, 191, 193 Assessment Masters: pp. 16, 23 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45; Math, pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45
b. Applies, analyzes, and evaluates common organizational structures (e.g., graphic organizers, logical order, cause and effect relationships, comparison and contrast).
Examples: SG II: pp. 38-39, 41-43, 46-47, 49, 52, 94, 103-105, 153-155, 158, 165, 200 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 38-39, 51-53, 56-57, 59, 52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 94, 103-105; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 153-155, 158, 165; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 200; Blackline Masters, pp. 234-237 Assessment Masters: pp. 61-65, 69-73
c. Recognizes and traces the development of an author’s argument, point of view, or perspective in text.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Understands and explains the use of a complex mechanical device by following technical directions.
See related material in TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-168D
e. Uses information from a variety of consumer, workplace, and public documents (e.g., job applications) to explain a situation or decision and to solve a problem.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA8R2 The student understands and acquires new vocabulary and uses it correctly in reading and writing. The student
Grade 7 Page 44 of 80
a. Determines pronunciations, meanings, alternate word choices, parts of speech, or etymologies of words.
See the following examples: SG I: pp. 8-10, 44-45, 50-51, 76-77, 100-102, 126-127, 132-133 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 8-10, 44-45, 50-51; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 76-77, 100-102; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 126-127, 132-133 SG II: pp. 2-3, 8-9, 20-21, 64-65, 76-77, 91-92, 120-121, 147-148 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 2-3, 8-9, 20-21; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65, 76-77, 91-92; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121, 147-148 Assessment Masters: pp. 20, 27, 36, 76, 84, 92, 100
b. Determines the meaning of unfamiliar words in content and context specific to reading and writing.
SG I: pp. 20-21, 106-107, 120-121 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 20-21; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 106-107; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 120-121 SG II: pp. 35-36, 132-133, 218-219 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 35-36; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 132-133; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 218-219 In addition, in vocabulary exercises throughout, students use context to determine word choice. Assessment Masters: Vocabulary Assessments throughout. Examples on pp. 11- 12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 43-44, 51-52 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp 8-10
c. Demonstrates an initial understanding of the history of the English Language.
SG I: pp. 8-9, 50-51, 64-65, 76-77, 132-133, 147-148 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 8-9, 50-51; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 64-65, 76- 77; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 132-133, 147-148 SG II: pp. 8-9, 64-65, 106-107, 120-121 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-9; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65, 106-107; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121 Assessment Masters: Examples on pp. 20, 28, 52, 100 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: p. 10
ELA8R3 The student reads aloud, accurately (in the range of 95%), familiar material in a variety of genres, in a way that makes meaning clear to listeners. The student
Grade 7 Page 45 of 80
a. Uses letter-sound knowledge to decode written English and uses a range of cueing systems (e.g., phonics and context clues) to determine pronunciation and meaning.
Examples: SG I: pp. 20-21, 50-51, 76-77, 91-92, 106-107, 120-121 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 20-21, 50-51; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 76-77, 91-92, 106-107; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 120-121 SG II: pp. 35-36, 64-65, 120-121, 132-133, 218-219 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 35-36; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121, 132-133; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 218-219 Assessment Masters: pp. 19, 28, 35-36, 51-52, 67-68
b. Uses self-correction when subsequent reading indicates an earlier miscue (self-monitoring and self-correcting strategies).
Students complete multiple activities dealing with any given reading, allowing them to revisit the reading material and clarify their analysis. In particular, predicting and inferencing activities encourage students to skim or quickly read passages, make predictions or analyze the reading, then reread for accuracy. See: SG I: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 SG II: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 53-57, 93-97, 101-105
c. Reads with a rhythm, flow, and meter that sounds like everyday speech (prosody).
Explicit instruction in oral reading fluency to improve reading achievement is included throughout the AMP program. See for example, instruction on: • Relaxed reading (SG II: pp. 16, 22, 34, 37, 49, 80, 105, 145,1750 • Breathing (SG II: pp. 18, 90, 128, 137, 220) • Pace (SG I: pp. 48-49, 52, 55, 104-105, 145; SG II: pp. 24, 48, 98, 166- 167, 207, 214, 216-217, 220, 222-223) • Natural breathing (SG I: pp. 72, 74-75) Students reread, in pairs or in groups, each of the passages in the Student Guides and are guided to carry out their daily independent reading fluently. Through teacher modeling, direct instruction, and tips, students focus on each of the aspects of fluency in each Student Guide unit. A Fluency tip appears with each passage in the Student Guide and is elaborated on in the Teacher’s Edition with suggestions for instruction, modeling, and practice. In addition, with the AMP Reading Online Library, students can repeatedly hear and read along with models of fluent reading.
Grade 7 Page 46 of 80
ELA8R4 The student acquires knowledge of Georgia authors and significant text created by them. The student
a. Identifies a variety of Georgia authors both male and female.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Identifies authors’ connections to Georgia through a variety of materials including electronic media.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Identifies award winning Georgia authors. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Examines texts from different genres (e.g. picture books, poetry, short stories, novels, essays, informational writing, and dramatic literature) created by Georgia authors.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Relates literary works created by Georgia authors to historical settings and or events.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Explains how Georgia is reflected in a literary work through setting, characterization, historical context, or current events.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Evaluates recurring or similar themes across a variety of selections written by Georgia authors, distinguishing theme from topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Reading Across the Curriculum
ELA8RC1 The student reads a minimum of 25 grade-level appropriate books or book equivalents (approximately 1,000,000 words) per year from a variety of subject disciplines. The student reads both informational and fictional texts in a variety of genres and modes of discourse, including technical texts related to various subject areas.
Grade 7 Page 47 of 80
ELA8RC2 The student participates in discussions related to curricular learning in all subject areas. The student
a. Identifies messages and themes from books in all subject areas.
SG I: pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 47-49, 52-55 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 47-49, 52-55 SG II: p. 179 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 13-16
b. Responds to a variety of texts in multiple modes of discourse.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books that correspond to the seven Student Guide units. Each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. Eighty-five percent of the selections are nonfiction. AMP Reading System Level II includes the following: • “Animal Tricks and Treks” (biology, geography, sociology) • “To the Rescue” (social studies, history, science) • “Blast Off!” (science, history) • “Living Your Dream” (fiction, biography, social studies) • “How Did They Do That?” (physics, engineering, history) • “Most Embarrassing Moments” (fiction, biography, history, sports) • “Great Goofs” (history, sports, science, literature, media) Students respond to these texts by summarizing, questioning, predicting, analyzing structure, visualizing, inferencing, and applying Metacognition skills. Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
c. Relates messages and themes from one subject area to those in another area.
In several units, students relate information from their own experience to the subject of the text they are reading to enhance their understanding of messages and themes. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 31, 34, 75, 87, 99, 116, 125, 134, 140 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, p. 31, 34; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 75, 87, 99; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 116, 125, 134, 140 SG I: pp. 14, 19, 28, 130, 138, 165 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 14, 19, 28; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 130, 138, 165 Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts also aid students in relating readings to social studies, science, and math.
Grade 7 Page 48 of 80
d. Evaluates the merits of texts in every subject discipline.
Students assess the merits and relevance of a wide range of texts and apply ideas from them in “After You Read” prompts throughout. See examples: SG I: pp. 34, 37, 40, 43, 46, 49, 52, 55, 60, 63, 72 SG II: pp. 10, 13, 25, 31, 34, 40, 43, 49, 55, 63, 69
e. Examines the author’s purpose in writing. Examples: SG I: pp. 17-19, 103-105, 108-111 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 17-19; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 103-105, 108- 111 SG II: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 38-40, 41-43 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 11-13, 17-19, 38-40, 41-43 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-17, 61-65, 69-73 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 27-31
f. Recognizes and uses the features of disciplinary texts (e.g., charts, graphs, photos, maps, highlighted vocabulary).
Examples: SG I: pp. 82, 117, 135, 138 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 82; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117, 135, 138 SG II: pp. 61-63, 66, 97-98, 108, 110 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 61-63, 66, 97-98, 108, 110 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp.32-36
ELA8RC3 The student acquires new vocabulary in each content area and uses it correctly. The student
a. Demonstrates an understanding of contextual vocabulary in various subjects.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level II. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary exercises analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 39-40, 43-44
Grade 7 Page 49 of 80
b. Uses content vocabulary in writing and speaking.
In vocabulary lessons throughout, students write their own sentences using or responding to vocabulary words. See examples: SG I: pp. 51, 65, 77, 107, 121, 127, 133, 142 SG II: pp. 36, 51, 59, 65, 71, 92, 101, 107, 115 Additionally, teaching tips in the TE encourage teachers to have students collaborate on ideas for writing sentences and to volunteer and discuss their sentences. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 3, 9, 21, 30, 45 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 3, 9, 21, 30, 45
c. Explores understanding of new words found in subject area texts.
SG I/II: Vocabulary exercises throughout the Student Guides focus on words that are found in the subject area reading assignments. In addition to previously noted strategies, students also explore synonyms and antonyms, how prefixes and suffixes change a base word, parts of speech, analogies, shades of meaning, word families, word origins, idioms, connotation and denotation, and so on. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78, 106-109 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52; Unit II: Questioning, pp. 64- 66, 76-78, 106-109 SG II: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-66, 76-78 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10
ELA8RC4 The student establishes a context for information acquired by reading across subject areas. The student
a. Explores life experiences related to subject area content.
“After You Read” and “Beyond the Text” questions help students relate personal life experiences to the subject area content. See examples: SG I: pp. 34, 55, 75, 87, 93, 125 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 34, 55; Unit 2: Questioning: pp. 75, 87, 93; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 125 SG II: pp. 7, 13, 19, 252, 43, 55, 128, 140, 143 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 7, 13, 19, 25, 43, 55; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 128, 140,143
Grade 7 Page 50 of 80
b. Discusses in both writing and speaking how certain words and concepts relate to multiple subjects.
Many of the reading materials apply one idea to several subjects. For example, information in “Animal Tricks and Treks” (Unit 1: Summarizing) is related to biology, geography, sociology, and media. Likewise, information in the reader “How Did They Do That?” (Unit 5: Visualizing) is related to engineering, history, and space technology.
c. Determines strategies for finding content and contextual meaning for unfamiliar words or concepts.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level II. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary words exercises analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 39-40, 43-44
Writing
ELA8W1 The student produces writing that establishes an appropriate organizational structure, sets a context and engages the reader, maintains a coherent focus throughout, and signals a satisfying closure. The student
a. Selects a focus, organizational structure, and a point of view based on purpose, genre expectations, audience, length, and format requirements.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
b. Writes texts of a length appropriate to address the topic or tell the story.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Uses traditional structures for conveying information (e.g., chronological order, cause and effect, similarity and difference, and posing and answering a question).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
d. Uses appropriate structures to ensure coherence (e.g., transition elements, parallel structure).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-G; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-230
Grade 7 Page 51 of 80
e. Supports statements and claims with anecdotes, descriptions, facts and statistics, and specific examples.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
ELA8W2 The student demonstrates competence in a variety of genres.
The student produces a narrative (fictional, personal, experiential) that:
a. Engages readers by establishing and developing a plot, setting, and point of view that are appropriate to the story (e.g., varied beginnings, standard plot line, cohesive devices, and a sharpened focus).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G
b. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Relates a clear, coherent incident, event, or situation by using well-chosen details.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G
d. Reveals the significance of the writer’s attitude about the subject.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Develops complex major and minor characters using standard methods of characterization.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Includes sensory details and concrete language to develop plot, setting, and character (e.g., vivid verbs, descriptive adjectives, varied sentence structures, and specific narrative action).
The use of sensory words in covered in: SG II, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109-111, 206-208 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109-111; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 206-208
g. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Uses a range of strategies (e.g., suspense, figurative language, dialogue, expanded vocabulary, flashback, movement, gestures, expressions, foreshadowing, tone, and mood).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 52 of 80
i. Provides a sense of closure appropriate to the writing.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F
The student produces writing (multi-paragraph expository composition such as description, explanation, comparison and contrast, or problem and solution) that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Develops a controlling idea that conveys a perspective on the subject.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
d. Develops the topic with supporting details. TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
e. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226
f. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
g. Concludes with a detailed summary linked to the purpose of the composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
The student produces technical writing (business correspondence: letters of application and letters of recommendation, résumés, abstracts, user guides or manuals, web pages).
a. Creates or follows an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 53 of 80
c. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Applies rules of Standard English. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a response to literature that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, or otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Demonstrates an understanding of the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Supports a judgment through references to the text and personal knowledge.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Justifies interpretations through sustained use of examples and textual evidence from the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Supports a judgment through references to the text, references to other works, authors, or non-print media, or references to personal knowledge.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Produces a judgment that is interpretive, analytic, evaluative, or reflective (orally, graphically, in writing).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Anticipates and answers a reader’s questions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a multi-paragraph persuasive essay that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 54 of 80
b. States a clear position or perspective in support of a proposition or proposal.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Creates an organizing structure that is appropriate to the needs, values, and interests of a specified audience, and arranges details, reasons, and examples.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Includes appropriate relevant information and arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Excludes information and arguments that are irrelevant.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Provides details, reasons, and examples, arranging them effectively by anticipating and answering reader concerns and counter-arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Supports arguments with detailed evidence, citing sources of information as appropriate.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Anticipates and addresses reader concerns and counter-arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a piece of writing drawn from research that:
a. Poses relevant and tightly drawn questions about the topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Engages the reader by establishing a context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Conveys clear and accurate perspectives on the subject.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. States a thesis. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 55 of 80
e. Records important ideas, concepts, and direct quotations from significant information sources, and paraphrases and summarizes all perspectives on the topic, as appropriate.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Uses a variety of primary and secondary sources and distinguishes the nature and value of each.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Organizes and displays information on charts, maps, and graphs.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Documents resources (bibliography, footnotes, endnotes, etc.).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA8W3 The student uses research and technology to support writing. The student
a. Plans and conducts multiple-step information searches by using computer networks and modems.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Achieves an effective balance between researched information and original ideas.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Avoids plagiarism. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA8W4 The student consistently uses the writing process to develop, revise, and evaluate writing. The student
a. Plans and drafts independently and resourcefully.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112CF; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Revises writing for appropriate organization, consistent point of view, and transitions between paragraphs, passages, and ideas.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Edits writing to improve word choice, grammar, punctuation, etc.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Grade 7 Page 56 of 80
Conventions
ELA8C1 The student demonstrates understanding and control of the rules of the English language, realizing that usage involves the appropriate application of conventions and grammar in both written and spoken formats. The student
a. Declines pronouns by gender and case, and demonstrates correct usage in sentences.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Analyzes and uses simple, compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences correctly, punctuates properly, and avoids fragments and run-ons.
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56C-E; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
c. Revises sentences by correcting misplaced and dangling modifiers.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Revises sentences by correcting errors in usage.
TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, p. 170
e. Demonstrates appropriate comma and semicolon usage (compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences, split dialogue, and for clarity).
TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 172-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
f. Analyzes the structure of a sentence (basic sentence parts, noun-adjective adverb clauses and phrases).
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56C-E; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 112C-E; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 56E-G
g. Produces final drafts/presentations that demonstrate accurate spelling and the correct use of punctuation and capitalization.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Listening/Speaking/Viewing
ELA8LSV1 The student participates in student-to-teacher, student-to-student, and group verbal interactions. The student
Grade 7 Page 57 of 80
a. Initiates new topics in addition to responding to adult-initiated topics.
Many oral language activities throughout TE I/II encourage student-initiated topics, particularly “After Students Read” sections. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 10, 13, 25, 49, 52 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 7, 13, 43, 55
b. Asks relevant questions. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Responds to questions with appropriate information.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 67, 68, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83
d. Confirms understanding by paraphrasing the adult’s directions or suggestions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Displays appropriate turn-taking behaviors. Students take turns with partners or in small groups to read aloud, analyze, discuss, etc. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 116, 118, 124, 130, 134, 136, 145, 146, 154
f. Actively solicits another person’s comments or opinions.
Students are directed to discuss readings, interpretations, predictions, and so on. Such discussion implies soliciting and considering another’s comments and opinions. See examples: TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 122, 125, 129, 141, 143, 147, 158, 161, 164
g. Offers own opinion forcefully without domineering.
Students have many opportunities to share their opinions in the course of class discussion. See examples: TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117, 125, 146, 149, 150, 161; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 175, 196
h. Responds appropriately to comments and questions.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 67, 68, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83
i. Volunteers contributions and responds when directly solicited by teacher or discussion leader.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 67, 68, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83
j. Gives reasons in support of opinions expressed.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: SG I/TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 125, 129, 135, 136, 138, 140 SG II/TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117, 119, 122, 125, 134, 135
k. Clarifies, illustrates, or expands on a response when asked to do so.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: SG I/TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 67, 73, 99, 111 SG II/TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 66, 67, 69, 72, 75
Grade 7 Page 58 of 80
l. Employs a group decision-making technique such as brainstorming or a problem-solving sequence (e.g., recognizes problem, defines problem, identifies possible solutions, selects optimal solution, implements solution, evaluates solution).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
m. Develops a plan of action or agenda for written and/or verbal follow-up.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA8LSV2 The student listens to and views various forms of text and media in order to gather and share information, persuade others, and express and understand ideas. The student will select and critically analyze messages using rubrics as assessment tools.
When responding to visual and oral texts and media (e.g., television, radio, film productions, and electronic media), the student:
a. Interprets and evaluates the various ways in which visual image makers (e.g., graphic artists, illustrators, news photographers) communicate information and affect impressions and opinions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Analyzes oral communication by paraphrasing a speaker’s purpose and point of view, and asks relevant questions concerning the speaker’s content, delivery, and purpose.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
When delivering and responding to presentations, the student:
a. Gives oral presentations or dramatic interpretations for various purposes.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 59 of 80
Grade 7 Page 60 of 80
b. Organizes information (e.g., message, vocabulary) to achieve particular purposes and to appeal to the background and interests of the audience.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Shows appropriate changes in delivery (e.g., gestures, expression, tone, pace, visuals).
SG I: pp. 10, 37, 39-40, 42-43, 49, 85, 99, 104, 108 TE I: Unit 1, pp. 10, 37, 39-40, 42-43, 49; Unit 2, Questioning, pp. 85, 99, 104, 1008 SG II: pp. 6, 7, 10, 19, 28, 33, 34, 42, 43, 54, 105, 108, 111, 134, 137 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 6, 7, 10, 19, 28, 33, 34, 42, 43, 54; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 105, 108, 111; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 134, 137
d. Uses language for dramatic effect. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Uses rubrics as assessment tools. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Responds to oral communications with questions, challenges, or affirmations.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Uses multimedia for presentations. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
CORRELATION TO THE GEORGIA PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
Subject Area: Language Arts State-Funded Course: Language Arts/Grade 8 Textbook Title: AMP Reading System, Level II (Green)____________________________ Publisher: Pearson _____________
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
Reading and Literature
ELA8R1 The student demonstrates comprehension and shows evidence of a warranted and responsible explanation of a variety of literary and informational texts.
For literary texts, the student identifies the characteristics of various genres and produces evidence of reading that:
a. Identifies the difference between the concepts of theme in a literary work and author’s purpose in an expository text.
Throughout the AMP program, students preview, discuss, and review author purpose and theme. See examples: SG I: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 159-161 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 17-19; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 159-161 SG II: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 38-40, 117-119, 153-155 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 11-13, 17-19, 38-40; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 153-155 Assessment Masters: pp. 21-25, 69-73
b. Compares and contrasts genre characteristics from two or more selections of literature.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Analyzes a character’s traits, emotions, or motivations and gives supporting evidence from the text(s).
SG II: pp. 135-136 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 135-136 Assessment Masters: pp. 101-105
Grade 8 Page 61 of 80
d. Compares and contrasts motivations and reactions of literary characters from different historical eras confronting similar situations or conflicts.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Evaluates recurring or similar themes across a variety of selections, distinguishing theme from topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Evaluates the structural elements of the plot (e.g., subplots, climax), the plot’s development, and the way in which conflicts are (or are not) addressed and resolved.
SG I: pp. 135-137 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 135-137 SG II: pp. 122-123, 134-137 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 122-123, 134-137 Assessment Masters, pp. 45-49, 93-97
g. Analyzes and evaluates the effects of sound, form, figurative language, and graphics in order to uncover meaning in literature:
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Sound (e.g., alliteration, onomatopoeia, internal rhyme, rhyme scheme, meter)
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ii. Figurative language (e.g., simile, metaphor, personification, hyperbole, symbolism, imagery).
SG II: pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109-111, 206-208 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109-111; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 206-208 Assessment Masters: pp. 80, 88, 120
h. Analyzes and evaluates how an author’s use of words creates tone and mood and provides supporting details from text.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
For informational texts, the student reads and comprehends in order to develop understanding and expertise and produces evidence of reading that:
Grade 8 Page 62 of 80
a. Analyzes and evaluates common textual features (e.g., paragraphs, topic sentences, concluding sentences, introduction, conclusion, footnotes, index, bibliography).
Examples: SG I: pp. 5-7, 10-12, 17-18, 24, 26-27, 41-43, 46-47, 49, 52-55; Glossary pp. 169-172 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 5-7, 10-12, 17-18, 24, 26-27, 41-43, 46-47, 49, 52-55 SG II: pp. 173, 175, 178, 185-186, 191, 193; Glossary pp. 225-229 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 173, 175, 178, 185-186, 191, 193 Assessment Masters: pp. 16, 23 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45; Math, pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45
b. Applies, analyzes, and evaluates common organizational structures (e.g., graphic organizers, logical order, cause and effect relationships, comparison and contrast).
Examples: SG II: pp. 38-39, 41-43, 46-47, 49, 52, 94, 103-105, 153-155, 158, 165, 200 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 38-39, 51-53, 56-57, 59, 52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 94, 103-105; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 153-155, 158, 165; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 200; Blackline Masters, pp. 234-237 Assessment Masters: pp. 61-65, 69-73
c. Recognizes and traces the development of an author’s argument, point of view, or perspective in text.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Understands and explains the use of a complex mechanical device by following technical directions.
See related material in TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-168D
e. Uses information from a variety of consumer, workplace, and public documents (e.g., job applications) to explain a situation or decision and to solve a problem.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA8R2 The student understands and acquires new vocabulary and uses it correctly in reading and writing. The student
Grade 8 Page 63 of 80
a. Determines pronunciations, meanings, alternate word choices, parts of speech, or etymologies of words.
See the following examples: SG I: pp. 8-10, 44-45, 50-51, 76-77, 100-102, 126-127, 132-133 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 8-10, 44-45, 50-51; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 76-77, 100-102; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 126-127, 132-133 SG II: pp. 2-3, 8-9, 20-21, 64-65, 76-77, 91-92, 120-121, 147-148 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 2-3, 8-9, 20-21; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65, 76-77, 91-92; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121, 147-148 Assessment Masters: pp. 20, 27, 36, 76, 84, 92, 100
b. Determines the meaning of unfamiliar words in content and context specific to reading and writing.
SG I: pp. 20-21, 106-107, 120-121 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 20-21; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 106-107; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 120-121 SG II: pp. 35-36, 132-133, 218-219 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 35-36; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 132-133; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 218-219 In addition, in vocabulary exercises throughout, students use context to determine word choice. Assessment Masters: Vocabulary Assessments throughout. Examples on pp. 11- 12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 43-44, 51-52 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp 8-10
c. Demonstrates an initial understanding of the history of the English Language.
SG I: pp. 8-9, 50-51, 64-65, 76-77, 132-133, 147-148 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 8-9, 50-51; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 64-65, 76- 77; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 132-133, 147-148 SG II: pp. 8-9, 64-65, 106-107, 120-121 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-9; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65, 106-107; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121 Assessment Masters: Examples on pp. 20, 28, 52, 100 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: p. 10
ELA8R3 The student reads aloud, accurately (in the range of 95%), familiar material in a variety of genres, in a way that makes meaning clear to listeners. The student
Grade 8 Page 64 of 80
a. Uses letter-sound knowledge to decode written English and uses a range of cueing systems (e.g., phonics and context clues) to determine pronunciation and meaning.
Examples: SG I: pp. 20-21, 50-51, 76-77, 91-92, 106-107, 120-121 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 20-21, 50-51; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 76-77, 91-92, 106-107; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 120-121 SG II: pp. 35-36, 64-65, 120-121, 132-133, 218-219 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 35-36; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121, 132-133; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 218-219 Assessment Masters: pp. 19, 28, 35-36, 51-52, 67-68
b. Uses self-correction when subsequent reading indicates an earlier miscue (self-monitoring and self-correcting strategies).
Students complete multiple activities dealing with any given reading, allowing them to revisit the reading material and clarify their analysis. In particular, predicting and inferencing activities encourage students to skim or quickly read passages, make predictions or analyze the reading, then reread for accuracy. See: SG I: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161,165-167 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 SG II: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 53-57, 93-97, 101-105
c. Reads with a rhythm, flow, and meter that sounds like everyday speech (prosody).
Explicit instruction in oral reading fluency to improve reading achievement is included throughout the AMP program. See for example, instruction on: • Relaxed reading (SG II: pp. 16, 22, 34, 37, 49, 80, 105, 145,1750 • Breathing (SG II: pp. 18, 90, 128, 137, 220) • Pace (SG I: pp. 48-49, 52, 55, 104-105, 145; SG II: pp. 24, 48, 98, 166- 167, 207, 214, 216-217, 220, 222-223) • Natural breathing (SG I: pp. 72, 74-75) Students reread, in pairs or in groups, each of the passages in the Student Guides and are guided to carry out their daily independent reading fluently. Through teacher modeling, direct instruction, and tips, students focus on each of the aspects of fluency in each Student Guide unit. A Fluency tip appears with each passage in the Student Guide and is elaborated on in the Teacher’s Edition with suggestions for instruction, modeling, and practice. In addition, with the AMP Reading Online Library, students can repeatedly hear and read along with models of fluent reading.
Grade 8 Page 65 of 80
ELA8R4 The student acquires knowledge of Georgia authors and significant text created by them. The student
a. Identifies a variety of Georgia authors both male and female.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Identifies authors’ connections to Georgia through a variety of materials including electronic media.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Identifies award winning Georgia authors.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Examines texts from different genres (e.g. picture books, poetry, short stories, novels, essays, informational writing, and dramatic literature) created by Georgia authors.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Relates literary works created by Georgia authors to historical settings and or events.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Explains how Georgia is reflected in a literary work through setting, characterization, historical context, or current events.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Evaluates recurring or similar themes across a variety of selections written by Georgia authors, distinguishing theme from topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 66 of 80
Reading Across the Curriculum
ELA8RC1 The student reads a minimum of 25 grade-level appropriate books or book equivalents (approximately 1,000,000 words) per year from a variety of subject disciplines. The student reads both informational and fictional texts in a variety of genres and modes of discourse, including technical texts related to various subject areas.
ELA8RC2 The student participates in discussions related to curricular learning in all subject areas. The student
a. Identifies messages and themes from books in all subject areas.
SG I: pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 47-49, 52-55 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 47-49, 52-55 SG II: p. 179 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 13-16
b. Responds to a variety of texts in multiple modes of discourse.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books that correspond to the seven Student Guide units. Each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. Eighty-five percent of the selections are nonfiction. AMP Reading System Level II includes the following: • “Animal Tricks and Treks” (biology, geography, sociology) • “To the Rescue” (social studies, history, science) • “Blast Off!” (science, history) • “Living Your Dream” (fiction, biography, social studies) • “How Did They Do That?” (physics, engineering, history) • “Most Embarrassing Moments” (fiction, biography, history, sports) • “Great Goofs” (history, sports, science, literature, media) Students respond to these texts by summarizing, questioning, predicting, analyzing structure, visualizing, inferencing, and applying Metacognition skills. Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
Grade 8 Page 67 of 80
c. Relates messages and themes from one subject area to those in another area.
In several units, students relate information from their own experience to the subject of the text they are reading to enhance their understanding of messages and themes. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 31, 34, 75, 87, 99, 116, 125, 134, 140 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, p. 31, 34; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 75, 87, 99; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 116, 125, 134, 140 SG I: pp. 14, 19, 28, 130, 138, 165 TE II: Unit 4:Text Structure, pp.14, 19, 28; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 130, 138,165 Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts also aid students in relating readings to social studies, science, and math.
d. Evaluates the merits of texts in every subject discipline.
Students assess the merits and relevance of a wide range of texts and apply ideas from them in “After You Read” prompts throughout. See examples: SG I: pp. 34, 37, 40, 43, 46, 49, 52, 55, 60, 63, 72 SG II: pp. 10, 13, 25, 31, 34, 40, 43, 49, 55, 63, 69
e. Examines the author’s purpose in writing.
Examples: SG I: pp. 17-19, 103-105, 108-111 TE I: Unit 1 Summarizing, pp. 17-19;Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 103-105, 108-111 SG II: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 38-40, 41-43 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 11-13, 17-19, 38-40, 41-43 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-17, 61-65, 69-73 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 27-31
f. Recognizes and uses the features of disciplinary texts (e.g., charts, graphs, photos, maps, highlighted vocabulary).
Examples: SG I: pp. 82, 117, 135, 138 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 82; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117, 135, 138 SG II: pp. 61-63, 66, 97-98, 108, 110 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 61-63, 66, 97-98, 108, 110 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp.32-36
ELA8RC3 The student acquires new vocabulary in each content area and uses it correctly. The student
Grade 8 Page 68 of 80
a. Demonstrates an understanding of contextual vocabulary in various subjects.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level II. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary exercises analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 39-40, 43-44
b. Uses content vocabulary in writing and speaking.
In vocabulary lessons throughout, students write their own sentences using or responding to vocabulary words. See examples: SG I: pp. 51, 65, 77, 107, 121, 127, 133, 142 SG II: pp. 36, 51, 59, 65, 71, 92, 101, 107, 115 Additionally, teaching tips in the TE encourage teachers to have students collaborate on ideas for writing sentences and to volunteer and discuss their sentences. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 3, 9, 21, 30, 45 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 3, 9, 21, 30, 45
c. Explores understanding of new words found in subject area texts.
SG I/II: Vocabulary exercises throughout the Student Guides focus on words that are found in the subject area reading assignments. In addition to previously noted strategies, students also explore synonyms and antonyms, how prefixes and suffixes change a base word, parts of speech, analogies, shades of meaning, word families, word origins, idioms, connotation and denotation, and so on. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78, 106-109 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52; Unit II: Questioning, pp. 64- 66, 76-78, 106-109 SG II: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-66, 76-78 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10
Grade 8 Page 69 of 80
ELA8RC4 The student establishes a context for information acquired by reading across subject areas. The student
a. Explores life experiences related to subject area content.
“After You Read” and “Beyond the Text” questions help students relate personal life experiences to the subject area content. See examples: SG I: pp. 34, 55, 75, 87, 93, 125 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 34, 55; Unit 2: Questioning: pp. 75, 87, 93; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 125 SG II: pp. 7, 13, 19, 252, 43, 55, 128, 140, 143 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 7, 13, 19, 25, 43, 55; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 128, 140,143
b. Discusses in both writing and speaking how certain words and concepts relate to multiple subjects.
Many of the reading materials apply one idea to several subjects. For example, information in “Animal Tricks and Treks” (Unit 1: Summarizing) is related to biology, geography, sociology, and media. Likewise, information in the reader “How Did They Do That?” (Unit 5: Visualizing) is related to engineering, history, and space technology.
c. Determines strategies for finding content and contextual meaning for unfamiliar words or concepts.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level II. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary words exercises analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 39-40, 43-44
Writing
ELA8W1 The student produces writing that establishes an appropriate organizational structure, sets a context and engages the reader, maintains a coherent focus throughout, and signals a satisfying closure. The student
a. Selects a focus, organizational structure, and a point of view based on purpose, genre expectations, audience, length, and format requirements.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
Grade 8 Page 70 of 80
b. Writes texts of a length appropriate to address the topic or tell the story.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Uses traditional structures for conveying information (e.g., chronological order, cause and effect, similarity and difference, and posing and answering a question).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
d. Uses appropriate structures to ensure coherence (e.g., transition elements, parallel structure).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-G; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-230
e. Supports statements and claims with anecdotes, descriptions, facts and statistics, and specific examples.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
ELA8W2 The student demonstrates competence in a variety of genres.
The student produces a narrative (fictional, personal, experiential) that:
a. Engages readers by establishing and developing a plot, setting, and point of view that are appropriate to the story (e.g., varied beginnings, standard plot line, cohesive devices, and a sharpened focus).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G
b. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Relates a clear, coherent incident, event, or situation by using well-chosen details.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G
d. Reveals the significance of the writer’s attitude about the subject.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 71 of 80
e. Develops complex major and minor characters using standard methods of characterization.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Includes sensory details and concrete language to develop plot, setting, and character (e.g., vivid verbs, descriptive adjectives, varied sentence structures, and specific narrative action).
The use of sensory words in covered in: SG II, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109-111, 206-208 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109-111; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 206-208
g. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Uses a range of strategies (e.g., suspense, figurative language, dialogue, expanded vocabulary, flashback, movement, gestures, expressions, foreshadowing, tone, and mood).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Provides a sense of closure appropriate to the writing.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F
The student produces writing (multi-paragraph expository composition such as description, explanation, comparison and contrast, or problem and solution) that:
b. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Develops a controlling idea that conveys a perspective on the subject.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
d. Develops the topic with supporting details.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Grade 8 Page 72 of 80
e. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226
f. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
g. Concludes with a detailed summary linked to the purpose of the composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
The student produces technical writing (business correspondence: letters of application and letters of recommendation, résumés, abstracts, user guides or manuals, web pages).
a. Creates or follows an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Applies rules of Standard English. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a response to literature that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, or otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Demonstrates an understanding of the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Supports a judgment through references to the text and personal knowledge.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Justifies interpretations through sustained use of examples and textual evidence from the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 73 of 80
e. Supports a judgment through references to the text, references to other works, authors, or non-print media, or references to personal knowledge.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Produces a judgment that is interpretive, analytic, evaluative, or reflective (orally, graphically, in writing).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Anticipates and answers a reader’s questions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Provides a sense of closure to the writing.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a multi-paragraph persuasive essay that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. States a clear position or perspective in support of a proposition or proposal.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Creates an organizing structure that is appropriate to the needs, values, and interests of a specified audience, and arranges details, reasons, and examples.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Includes appropriate relevant information and arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Excludes information and arguments that are irrelevant.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Provides details, reasons, and examples, arranging them effectively by anticipating and answering reader concerns and counter-arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 74 of 80
g. Supports arguments with detailed evidence, citing sources of information as appropriate.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Anticipates and addresses reader concerns and counter-arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Provides a sense of closure to the writing.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a piece of writing drawn from research that:
a. Poses relevant and tightly drawn questions about the topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Engages the reader by establishing a context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Conveys clear and accurate perspectives on the subject.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. States a thesis. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Records important ideas, concepts, and direct quotations from significant information sources, and paraphrases and summarizes all perspectives on the topic, as appropriate.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Uses a variety of primary and secondary sources and distinguishes the nature and value of each.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Organizes and displays information on charts, maps, and graphs.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Provides a sense of closure to the writing.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Documents resources (bibliography, footnotes, endnotes, etc.).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 75 of 80
ELA8W3 The student uses research and technology to support writing. The student
a. Plans and conducts multiple-step information searches by using computer networks and modems.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Achieves an effective balance between researched information and original ideas.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Avoids plagiarism. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA8W4 The student consistently uses the writing process to develop, revise, and evaluate writing. The student
a. Plans and drafts independently and resourcefully.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112CF; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Revises writing for appropriate organization, consistent point of view, and transitions between paragraphs, passages, and ideas.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Edits writing to improve word choice, grammar, punctuation, etc.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Conventions
ELA8C1 The student demonstrates understanding and control of the rules of the English language, realizing that usage involves the appropriate application of conventions and grammar in both written and spoken formats. The student
a. Declines pronouns by gender and case, and demonstrates correct usage in sentences.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 76 of 80
b. Analyzes and uses simple, compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences correctly, punctuates properly, and avoids fragments and run-ons.
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56C-E; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
c. Revises sentences by correcting misplaced and dangling modifiers.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Revises sentences by correcting errors in usage.
TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, p. 170
e. Demonstrates appropriate comma and semicolon usage (compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences, split dialogue, and for clarity).
TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 172-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
f. Analyzes the structure of a sentence (basic sentence parts, noun-adjective adverb clauses and phrases).
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56C-E; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 112C-E; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 56E-G
g. Produces final drafts/presentations that demonstrate accurate spelling and the correct use of punctuation and capitalization.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Listening/Speaking/Viewing
ELA8LSV1 The student participates in student-to-teacher, student-to-student, and group verbal interactions. The student
a. Initiates new topics in addition to responding to adult-initiated topics.
Many oral language activities throughout TE I/II encourage student-initiated topics, particularly “After Students Read” sections. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 10, 13, 25, 49, 52 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 7, 13, 43, 55
b. Asks relevant questions. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Responds to questions with appropriate information.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 67, 68, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83
Grade 8 Page 77 of 80
d. Confirms understanding by paraphrasing the adult’s directions or suggestions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Displays appropriate turn-taking behaviors.
Students take turns with partners or in small groups to read aloud, analyze, discuss, etc. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 116, 118, 124, 130, 134, 136, 145, 146, 154
f. Actively solicits another person’s comments or opinions.
Students are directed to discuss readings, interpretations, predictions, and so on. Such discussion implies soliciting and considering another’s comments and opinions. See examples: TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 122, 125, 129, 141, 143, 147, 158, 161, 164
g. Offers own opinion forcefully without domineering.
Students have many opportunities to share their opinions in the course of class discussion. See examples: TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117, 125, 146, 149, 150, 161; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 175, 196
h. Responds appropriately to comments and questions.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 67, 68, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83
i. Volunteers contributions and responds when directly solicited by teacher or discussion leader.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 67, 68, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83
j. Gives reasons in support of opinions expressed.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: SG I/TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 125, 129, 135, 136, 138, 140 SG II/TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117, 119, 122, 125, 134, 135
k. Clarifies, illustrates, or expands on a response when asked to do so.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: SG I/TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 67, 73, 99, 111 SG II/TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 66, 67, 69, 72, 75
l. Employs a group decision-making technique such as brainstorming or a problem-solving sequence (e.g., recognizes problem, defines problem, identifies possible solutions, selects optimal solution, implements solution, evaluates solution).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
m. Develops a plan of action or agenda for written and/or verbal follow-up.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 78 of 80
ELA8LSV2 The student listens to and views various forms of text and media in order to gather and share information, persuade others, and express and understand ideas. The student will select and critically analyze messages using rubrics as assessment tools.
When responding to visual and oral texts and media (e.g., television, radio, film productions, and electronic media), the student:
a. Interprets and evaluates the various ways in which visual image makers (e.g., graphic artists, illustrators, news photographers) communicate information and affect impressions and opinions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Analyzes oral communication by paraphrasing a speaker’s purpose and point of view, and asks relevant questions concerning the speaker’s content, delivery, and purpose.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
When delivering and responding to presentations, the student:
a. Gives oral presentations or dramatic interpretations for various purposes.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Organizes information (e.g., message, vocabulary) to achieve particular purposes and to appeal to the background and interests of the audience.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 79 of 80
Grade 8 Page 80 of 80
c. Shows appropriate changes in delivery (e.g., gestures, expression, tone, pace, visuals).
SG I: pp. 10, 37, 39-40, 42-43, 49, 85, 99, 104, 108 TE I: Unit 1, pp. 10, 37, 39-40, 42-43, 49; Unit 2, Questioning, pp. 85, 99, 104, 1008 SG II: pp. 6, 7, 10, 19, 28, 33, 34, 42, 43, 54, 105, 108, 111, 134, 137 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 6, 7, 10, 19, 28, 33, 34, 42, 43, 54; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 105, 108, 111; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 134, 137
d. Uses language for dramatic effect. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Uses rubrics as assessment tools. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Responds to oral communications with questions, challenges, or affirmations.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Uses multimedia for presentations. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
AMP READING SYSTEM LEVEL III
Correlated to: GEORGIA PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
Language Arts
Grade 6-8
Copyright © 2008 Pearson Education, Inc. or its affiliate(s). All rights reserved.
Grade 6 Page 2 of 63
CORRELATION TO THE GEORGIA PERFORMANCE STANDARDS Subject Area: Language Arts State-Funded Course: Language Arts/Grade 6 Textbook Title: AMP Reading System, Level III (Turquoise) Publisher: Pearson
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
ELA6R1 Reading and Literature The student demonstrates comprehension and shows evidence of a warranted and responsible explanation of a variety of literary and informational texts.
Direct and intensive teaching of comprehension strategies, one strategy at a time, is the foundation of AMP Reading. Each strategy is taught, practiced, and applied in the course of a unit, and comprehension monitoring is taught with each strategy. See: TE I: pp. T14-17, T20 Unit I: Summarizing; Unit 2: Questioning; Unit 3: Predicting TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure; Unit 5: Visualizing; Unit 6: Inferencing; Unit 7: Metacognition Student Guide: Multiple comprehension strategies are used throughout, including previewing, problem/solution analysis, analyzing sequence, summarizing, comparing and contrasting, understanding cause and effect, using text clues, using picture clues, likening to personal experience, using inferences, making predictions, and so forth. Lessons begin with an activity that includes an explanation of the strategy and how it helps students become better readers. There is an illustration or passage used to demonstrate the strategy and immediate opportunity for student response in the margin. After the initial activity, further question/response reading comprehension activities are included for additional reinforcement. See the following examples: SG I: Unit I, Nature’s Fury pp. 4-7, 10-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 46-49, 52-55 SG II: Unit 4, Living Your Dream pp. 4-7, 10-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 46-49, 52-55 Assessment Masters: Assessment of student comprehension is continuous and ongoing. Each unit includes a Mid-Unit Assessment and an End-of-Unit Assessment. See examples on pages 13-17, 21-25, 29-33, 37-41 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, and Math: pp. 13-16, 28-31
Grade 6 Page 3 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
For literary texts, the student identifies the characteristics of various genres and produces evidence of reading that:
a. Identifies and analyzes sensory details and figurative language.
SG II: pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109, 206 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp 206 Assessment Masters: pp. 80, 81
b. Identifies and analyzes the author’s use of dialogue and description.
SG I: pp. 160 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, p. 160 SG II: pp. 23-25, 53, 67-69, 73-75, 78, 109-110, 206 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5, 11, 23-25, 53; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67- 69, 73-75, 78, 109-110; Unit 7: Metacognition: pp. 206 Assessment Masters: pp. 64-65, 80-81
c. Relates a literary work to historical events of the period.
SG I: pp. 23, 24, 151, 153, 154, 160 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 23, 24; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 151, 153, 154, 160 SG II: pp. 6, 24, 54, 62, 95, 98, 130, 139, 174, 180, 192 TE II: Unit 4: Test Structure, pp. 5, 24, 54; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 62, 95, 98; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 130, 139; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 174, 180, 192 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-17, 37-41, 61-65, 93-97
d. Applies knowledge of the concept that theme refers to the message about life and the world that the author wants us to understand whether implied or stated.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Identifies and analyzes the elements of setting, characterization, plot, and the resolution of the conflict of a story or play:
i. internal/external conflicts
SG I: pp. 73, 74, 136 TE I: pp. Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 73, 74; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 136 SG II: pp. 12, 13, 16, 19, 22, 33, 124, 164
Grade 6 Page 4 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
ii. character conflicts, characters vs. nature, characters vs. society
iii. antagonist/protagonist.
TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 12, 13, 16, 19, 22, 33; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 124, 164 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 101-105
f. Identifies the speaker and recognizes the difference between first- and third-person narration.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Defines and explains how tone is conveyed in literature through word choice, sentence structure, punctuation, rhythm, repetition, and rhyme.
SG I: pp. 93, 96 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, p. 93, 96
h. Responds to and explains the effects of sound, figurative language, and graphics in order to uncover meaning in literature:
i. Sound (e.g., alliteration, onomatopoeia, rhyme scheme)
ii. Figurative language (i.e., simile, metaphor, hyperbole, personification)
iii. Graphics (i.e., capital letters, line length, bold face print, italics).
SG I: pp. 135-137 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 135-137
i. Compares traditional literature and mythology from different cultures.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
j. Identifies and analyzes similarities and differences in mythologies from different cultures.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 6 Page 5 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
For informational texts, the student reads and comprehends in order to develop
understanding and expertise and produces evidence of reading that:
a. Applies knowledge of common textual features (e.g., paragraphs, topic sentences, concluding sentences, glossary, index).
Examples: SG I: pp. 6-7, 12, 19, 22, 24, 26-27, 38, 40, 53, 61, 69, 122, 135-136; Glossary pp. 169-172 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 6-7, 12, 19, 22, 24, 26-, 38, 40, 53; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 61, 69; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 122, 135-136 SG II: pp. 173, 179; Glossary pp. 225-229 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 173, 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 16, 23 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45; Math, pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45
b. Applies knowledge of common graphic features (i.e., graphic organizers, diagrams, captions, illustrations, charts, tables, graphs).
Examples: SG I: pp. 38-39, 61, 69, 82, 117, 138 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, p. 38-39; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 61, 69, 82, 117; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 138; Blackline Masters, pp. 179, 181, 183 SG II: pp. 26, 61-63, 66, 68, 72, 97-98, 102, 109, 111, 154, 173, 191, 200, 202, 205 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, p. 26; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 61-63, 66, 68, 72, 97-98, 102, 109, 111; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 202, 205; Blackline Masters, pp. 231-243 Assessment Masters: pp. 24, 89, 121 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 31, 46-48; Math pp. 30, 41-43
Grade 6 Page 6 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
c. Applies knowledge of common organizational structures and patterns (e.g., transitions, logical order, cause and effect, classification schemes).
Examples: SG I: p. 131 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, p. 131 SG II: pp. 5, 11, 16-19, 32-34, 37, 40, 53, 88, 138-140, 143, 159, 165, 200 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5, 11, 16-19, 32-34, 37, 40, 53; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 88; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 138-140, 143, 159, 165; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 200; Blackline Masters, pp. 234-237 Assessment Masters: pp. 61-65, 69-73, 80
d. Identifies and analyzes main ideas, supporting ideas, and supporting details.
While activities supporting this standard are found throughout the AMP Reading System, identifying and analyzing main ideas, supporting ideas, and supporting details is the particular focus of Unit 1: Summarizing. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 4-7, 10-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 46-50, 52-56 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 4-7, 10-13, 16-19, 22-28, 31-34, 37-43, 46-50, 52-56 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math, pp. 13-16
e. Follows multi-step instructions to complete or create a simple product.
TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-168D Assessment Masters: pp. 109-113
ELA6R2 The student understands and acquires new vocabulary and uses it correctly in reading and writing. The student
Grade 6 Page 7 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
a. Determines the meaning of unfamiliar words by using word, sentence, and paragraph clues.
SG I: pp. See Vocabulary Exercises throughout. Examples on pp. 2-3, 8-9, 14- 15, 35-36, 64-65, 70-71, 91-92 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 2-3, 8-9, 14-15, 35-36; Unit II: Questioning, pp. 64-65, 70-71, 91-92 SG II: See Vocabulary Exercises throughout. Examples on pp. 8-9, 14-15, 20- 21, 64-65, 76-77 120-121, 141-142, 162-163 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-9, 14-15, 20-21; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65, 76-77; Unit 6: Inferencing: pp. 120-121, 141-142, 162-163 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary Assessments throughout. Examples on pp. 11- 12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 43-44, 51-52 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp 8-10
b. Uses knowledge of Greek and Latin affixes to understand unfamiliar vocabulary.
SG I: pp. 8-9, 91-92, 147-148, 162-163 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 8-9; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 91-92; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 147-148, 162-163 SG II: pp. 8-9, 64-65, 76-77, 120-121, 203-204 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-9; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65, 76-77; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121; Unit 7: Metacognition: pp. 203-204 Assessment Masters: Examples on pp. 44, 52, 92, 116 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: p. 10
c. Identifies and interprets words with multiple meanings.
SG I: p. 106 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, p. 106 SG II: p. 91 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, p. 91
d. Uses reference skills to determine pronunciations, meanings, alternate word choices, and parts of speech of words.
Examples: SG I: pp. 12, 14, 20-21, 30, 50, 77, 89 TE I: Unit 1:Summarizing, pp.12, 14, 20-21, 30, 50; Unit 2:Questioning, p.77,89 SG II: pp. 16, 24, 29, 85, 100, 126, 141 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, p. 16, 24, 29; Unit 5:Visualizing, pp. 85, 100; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 126, 141 Assessment masters: Examples on pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 43-44, 51-52, 59-60
Grade 6 Page 8 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
The student reads aloud, accurately (in the range of 95%), familiar material in a variety of genres, in a way that makes meaning clear to listeners. The student
a. Uses letter-sound knowledge to decode written English and uses a range of cueing systems (e.g., phonics and context clues) to determine pronunciation and meaning.
Examples: SG I: pp. 2-3, 29-30, 58-59, 100-101, 126-127 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 2-3, 29-30; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 58-59, 100- 101; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 126-127 SG II: pp. 14-15, 20, 44-45, 70-71, 85-86, 162 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 14-15, 20, 44-45; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 70- 71, 85-86; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 162 Assessment Masters: pp. 19, 28, 35-36, 51-52, 67-68
ELA6R3
b. Uses self-correction when subsequent reading indicates an earlier miscue (self-monitoring and self-correcting strategies).
Students complete multiple activities dealing with any given reading, allowing them to revisit the reading material and clarify their analysis. In particular, predicting and inferencing activities encourage students to skim or quickly read passages, make predictions or analyze the reading, then reread for accuracy. See: SG I: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 SG II: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 53-57, 93-97, 101-105
Grade 6 Page 9 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
c. Reads with a rhythm, flow, and meter that sounds like everyday speech (prosody).
Explicit instruction in oral reading fluency to improve reading achievement is included throughout the AMP program. See for example, instruction on: • Relaxed reading (SG II: pp. • Natural Breaks (SG II: pp. 181, 190, 192, 222) • Pace (SG I: pp. 42, 49, 54-55, 102, 104-105, 110-111; SG II: pp. 54, 105, 145, 160, 214, 217, 220, 223) • Pauses (SG I: pp. 46, 72, 139, 149, 167); SG II: pp. 4, 13, 37, 52, 55, 62, 66, 95, 102 Students reread, in pairs or in groups, each of the passages in the Student Guides and are guided to carry out their daily independent reading fluently. Through teacher modeling, direct instruction, and tips, students focus on each of the aspects of fluency in each Student Guide unit. A Fluency tip appears with each passage in the Student Guide and is elaborated on in the Teacher’s Edition with suggestions for instruction, modeling, and practice. In addition, with the AMP Reading Online Library, students can repeatedly hear and read along with models of fluent reading.
ELA6RC1 Reading Across the Curriculum The student reads a minimum of 25 grade-level appropriate books or book equivalents (approximately 1,000,000 words) per year from a variety of subject disciplines. The student reads both informational and fictional texts in a variety of genres and modes of discourse, including technical texts related to various subject areas.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books that correspond to the seven Student Guide units. Each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. Eighty-five percent of the selections are nonfiction. AMP Reading System Level III includes the following: • “Nature’s Fury” (geography, earth science, history, health/medicine, social studies) • “High-Tech Crime Fighters” (forensic science, chemistry, biology, anatomy, art, computer science, history, biography) • “Out of Control” (biology, ecology, history, health/medicine) • “Ancient Lives Unveiled” (historical fiction, history, social studies, film) • “Making Movies” (film, art, biography, history) • “Terrific Teams” (sports, geography, social studies, health/medicine, fiction) • “Medical Miracles” (health/medicine, career education, history, engineering, bioengineering) Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
Grade 6 Page 10 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
The student participates in discussions related to curricular learning in all subject areas. The student
a. Identifies messages and themes from books in all subject areas.
SG I: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24-28, 31-34, 37, 43, 46, 49, 52-53 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24-28, 31-34, 37, 43, 46, 49, 52-53 SG II: p. 54, 179 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, p. 54; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 13-16
ELA6RC2
b. Responds to a variety of texts in multiple modes of discourse.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books that correspond to the seven Student Guide units. Each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. Eighty-five percent of the selections are nonfiction. AMP Reading System Level III includes the following: • “Nature’s Fury” (geography, earth science, history, health/medicine, social studies) • “High-Tech Crime Fighters” (forensic science, chemistry, biology, anatomy, art, computer science, history, biography) • “Out of Control” (biology, ecology, history, health/medicine) • “Ancient Lives Unveiled” (historical fiction, history, social studies, film) • “Making Movies” (film, art, biography, history) • “Terrific Teams” (sports, geography, social studies, health/medicine, fiction) • “Medical Miracles” (health/medicine, career education, history, engineering, bioengineering) Students respond to these texts by summarizing, questioning, predicting, analyzing structure, visualizing, inferencing, and applying Metacognition skills. In addition, Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
Grade 6 Page 11 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
c. Relates messages and themes from one subject area to those in another area.
In several units, students relate information from their own experience to the subject of the text they are reading to enhance their understanding of messages and themes. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 4, 10, 49, 84, 158, 167 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, p. 4, 10, 49; Unit 2: Questioning, p. 84, Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 158, 167 SG I: pp. 10, 16, 43, 128, 137, 143, 155 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 10, 16, 43; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 128, 137, 143 Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts also aid students in relating readings to social studies, science, and math.
d. Evaluates the merits of texts in every subject discipline.
Students assess the merits and relevance of a wide range of texts and apply ideas from them in “After You Read” prompts throughout. See examples: SG I: pp. 16, 22, 31, 34, 40, 43, 46, 55, 63, 66, 81, 87 SG II: pp. 19, 25, 34, 46, 63, 69, 87, 93, 102, 105, 122
e. Examines the author’s purpose in writing. Examples: SG I: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24, 26-27, 38, 40, 53 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24, 26-27, 30, 40, 53 SG II: p. 54, 173, 179 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, p. 54; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 173, 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 13-16
f. Recognizes and uses the features of disciplinary texts (e.g., charts, graphs, photos, maps, highlighted vocabulary).
Examples: SG I: pp. 26-27, 82, 117, 118, 135, 138, 139 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 26-27; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 82; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117, 118, 135, 138, 139 SG II: pp. 61-63, 66, 68, 72, 109, 110 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 61-63, 66, 68, 72, 109, 110 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp.32-36
Grade 6 Page 12 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
The student acquires new vocabulary in each content area and uses it correctly. The student
a. Demonstrates an understanding of contextual vocabulary in various subjects.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level II. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary exercises analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 39-40, 43-44
b. Uses content vocabulary in writing and speaking.
In vocabulary lessons throughout, students write their own sentences using or responding to vocabulary words. See examples: SG I: pp. 21, 36, 45, 86, 92, 107, 115, 121, 133 SG II: pp. 9, 15, 36, 45, 51, 59, 71, 86, 101, 115 Additionally, teaching tips in the TE encourage teachers to have students collaborate on ideas for writing sentences and to volunteer and discuss their sentences. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 15, 21, 36, 45 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 3, 9, 15, 30, 45
ELA6RC3
c. Explores understanding of new words found in subject area texts.
SG I/II: Vocabulary exercises throughout the Student Guides focus on words that are found in the subject area reading assignments. In addition to previously noted strategies, students also explore synonyms and antonyms, how prefixes and suffixes change a base word, parts of speech, analogies, shades of meaning, word families, word origins, idioms, connotation and denotation, and so on. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 8-9, 20-21, 50-51, 64-65, 76-77, 106-107 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing: pp. 8-9, 20-21, 50-51; Unit II: Questioning, pp. 64- 65, 76-77, 106-107 SG II: pp. 8-9, 20-21, 35-36, 50-51, 64-65, 76-77 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-9, 20-21, 35-36, 50-51; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65, 76-77 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10
Grade 6 Page 13 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
The student establishes a context for information acquired by reading across subject areas. The student
a. Explores life experiences related to subject area content.
“After You Read” and “Beyond the Text” questions help students relate personal life experiences to the subject area content. See examples: SG I: pp. 4, 13, 37, 72, 116, 128, 152 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 4, 13, 37; Unit 2: Questioning: pp. 72; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 116, 128, 152 SG II: pp. 4, 10, 16, 22, 28, 43, 60, 72, 81, 90, 96, 99 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 10, 16, 22, 28, 43; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 60, 72, 81, 90, 96, 99
b. Discusses in both writing and speaking how certain words and concepts relate to multiple subjects.
Many of the reading materials apply one idea to several subjects. For example, information in ““Nature’s Fury” (Unit 1: Summarizing) is related to geography, earth science, history, health/medicine, and social studies Likewise, information in the reader “Ancient Lives Unveiled” (Unit 4: Visualizing) is related to historical fiction, history, social studies, and film.
ELA6RC4
c. Determines strategies for finding content and contextual meaning for unfamiliar words or concepts.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level II. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary words exercises analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 39-40, 43-44
Grade 6 Page 14 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
Writing The student produces writing that establishes an appropriate organizational structure, sets a context and engages the reader, maintains a coherent focus throughout, and provides a satisfying closure. The student
a. Selects a focus, an organizational structure, and a point of view based on purpose, genre expectations, audience, length, and format requirements.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
b. Writes texts of a length appropriate to address the topic or tell the story.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Uses traditional structures for conveying information (e.g., chronological order, cause and effect, similarity and difference, and posing and answering a question).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
ELA6W1
d. Uses appropriate structures to ensure coherence (e.g., transition elements).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-G; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-230
The student demonstrates competence in a variety of genres.
The student produces a narrative (fictional, personal) that:
ELA6W2
a. Engages readers by establishing and developing a plot, setting, and point of view that are appropriate to the story (e.g., varied beginnings, standard plot line, cohesive devices).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G
Grade 6 Page 15 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
b. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Includes sensory details and concrete language to develop plot, setting, and character (e.g., vivid verbs, descriptive adjectives, and varied sentence structures).
The use of sensory words in covered in: SG II, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109, 206-208 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 206-208
d. Uses a range of strategies (e.g., suspense, figurative language, dialogue, expanded vocabulary, movement, gestures, expressions).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Excludes extraneous details and inconsistencies.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Provides a sense of closure appropriate to the writing.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F
The student produces writing (multi-paragraph expository composition such as description, explanation, comparison and contrast, or problem and solution) that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Establishes a statement as the main idea or topic sentence.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Develops a controlling idea that conveys a perspective on the subject.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Grade 6 Page 16 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
d. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
e. Develops the topic with supporting details. TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
f. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226
g. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
h. Concludes with a detailed summary linked to the purpose of the composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
The student produces technical writing (friendly letters, thank-you notes, formula poems, instructions) that:
a. Creates or follows an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Applies rules of Standard English.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a response to literature that:
Grade 6 Page 17 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Demonstrates an understanding of the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Advances a judgment that is interpretive, analytic, evaluative, or reflective.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Organizes an interpretation around several clear ideas, premises, or images.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Supports a judgment through references to the text.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a multi-paragraph persuasive essay that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. States a clear position of a proposition or proposal.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Supports the position with organized and relevant evidence.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Excludes information and arguments that are irrelevant.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 6 Page 18 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
e. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to a specific purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Anticipates and addresses readers’ concerns and counter-arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student uses research and technology to support writing. The student
a. Uses organizational features of electronic text (e.g., bulletin boards, databases, keyword searches, e-mail addresses) to locate relevant information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Includes researched information in different types of products (e.g., compositions, multimedia presentations, graphic organizers, projects, etc.).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA6W3
c. Cites references. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student consistently uses the writing process to develop, revise, and evaluate writing. The student
a. Plans and drafts independently and resourcefully.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112CF; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
ELA6W4
b. Revises manuscripts to improve the organization and consistency of ideas within and between paragraphs.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Grade 6 Page 19 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
c. Edits to correct errors in spelling, punctuation, etc.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Conventions The student demonstrates understanding and control of the rules of the English language, realizing that usage involves the appropriate application of conventions and grammar in both written and spoken formats. The student
ELA6C1
a. Identifies and uses the eight basic parts of speech and demonstrates that words can be different parts of speech within a sentence.
i. Identifies and uses nouns – abstract, common, collective, plural, and possessive.
ii. Identifies and uses pronouns – personal, possessive, interrogative, demonstrative, reflexive, and indefinite.
iii. Identifies and uses adjectives – common, proper, and demonstrative.
iv. Identifies and uses verbs – action (transitive/intransitive), linking, and state-of-being.
v. Identifies and uses verb phrases – main verbs and helping verbs.
vi. Identifies and uses adverbs.
vii. Identifies and uses prepositional phrases (preposition, object of the preposition, and any of its modifiers).
viii. Identifies and uses conjunctions –
SG I: pp. 106-107 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 106-107
SG I: pp. 106-107 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 106-107
TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 112E-G
Grade 6 Page 20 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
coordinating, correlative, and common subordinating.
ix. Identifies and uses interjections.
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56E-F; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 172-174 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
b. Recognizes basic parts of a sentence (subject, verb, direct object, indirect object, predicate noun, predicate adjective).
TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 56C-F; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
c. Identifies and writes simple, compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences, avoiding fragments and run-ons.
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56C-E; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-172 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
d. Demonstrates appropriate comma and semicolon usage (compound and complex sentences, appositives, words in direct address).
TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 172-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
e. Uses common spelling rules, applies common spelling patterns, and develops and masters words that are commonly misspelled.
Spelling rules are built in to vocabulary worksheets, particularly those that focus on affixes and homophones. See examples: SG I: pp. 8-9, 64-65, 91-92, 132-133, 147-148, 162-163 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 8-9; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 64-65, 91-92; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 132-133, 147-148, 162-163 SG II: pp. 64-65, 76-77, 120-121, 132-133, 147-148 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65, 76-77; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121, 132-133, 147-148
f. Produces final drafts that demonstrate accurate spelling and the correct use of punctuation and capitalization.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Grade 6 Page 21 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
Listening/Speaking/Viewing The student participates in student-to-teacher, student-to-student, and group verbal interactions. The student
a. Initiates new topics in addition to responding to adult-initiated topics.
Many oral language activities throughout TE I/II encourage student-initiated topics, particularly “Engage Students” and “After Students Read” sections. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 10, 11, 13, 19, 25, 49, 52 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 7, 10, 11, 13, 43, 55
b. Asks relevant questions. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Responds to questions with appropriate information.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 63, 64, 67, 68, 69, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 116, 117, 123, 124, 125, 130, 135, 136, 137
d. Confirms understanding by paraphrasing the adult’s directions or suggestions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Displays appropriate turn-taking behaviors. Students take turns with partners or in small groups to read aloud, analyze, discuss, etc. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 116, 118, 124, 125, 128, 130, 134, 136, 145
f. Actively solicits another person’s comments or opinions.
Students are directed to discuss readings, interpretations, predictions, and so on. Such discussion implies soliciting and considering another’s comments and opinions. See examples: TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 128, 129, 131, 137, 146, 147, 152, 155, 158, 161, 164
ELA6LSV1
g. Offers own opinion forcefully without being domineering.
Students have many opportunities to share their opinions in the course of class discussion. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 122, 134, 140, 146, 152 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 131, 135, 137, 165
Grade 6 Page 22 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
h. Responds appropriately to comments and questions.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 63, 64, 67, 68, 69, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 116, 117, 123, 124, 125, 130, 135, 136, 137
i. Volunteers contributions and responds when directly solicited by teacher or discussion leader.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 63, 64, 67, 68, 69, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 116, 117, 123, 124, 125, 130, 135, 136, 137
j. Gives reasons in support of opinions expressed. Throughout SG?TE I/II. See examples: SGI/TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 122, 134, 140, 146, 152 SGI/TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 131, 135, 137, 165
k. Clarifies, illustrates, or expands on a response when asked to do so.
Throughout SG/TE I/II. See examples: SG I/TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 66, 72, 73, 78, 99 SG II/TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 66, 69, 78, 81, 87
l. Employs a group decision-making technique such as brainstorming or a problem-solving sequence (e.g., recognizes problem, defines problem, identifies possible solutions, selects optimal solution, implements solution, evaluates solution).
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 73, 78, 94, 95, 97 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22
m. Writes a response to/reflection of interactions with others.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student listens to and views various forms of text and media in order to gather and share information, persuade others, and express and understand ideas. The student will select and critically analyze messages using rubrics as assessment tools.
ELA6LSV2
When responding to visual and oral texts and media (e.g., television, radio, film productions,
Grade 6 Page 23 of 63
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
and electronic media), the student:
a. Identifies persuasive and propaganda techniques used in media and identifies false and misleading information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Identifies the tone, mood, and emotion conveyed in the oral communication.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
When delivering or responding to presentations, the student:
a. Gives oral presentations or dramatic interpretations for various purposes.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Shows appropriate changes in delivery (e.g., gestures, vocabulary, pace, visuals).
Examples: SG I: pp. 10, 37, 39-40, 42-43, 49, 85, 99, 104, 108 TE I: Unit 1, pp. 10, 37, 39-40, 42-43, 49; Unit 2, Questioning, pp. 85, 99, 104, 1008 SG II: pp. 6, 7, 10, 19, 28, 33, 34, 42, 43, 54, 105, 108, 111, 134, 137 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 6, 7, 10, 19, 28, 33, 34, 42, 43, 54; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 105, 108, 111; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 134, 137
c. Uses language for dramatic effect. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Uses rubrics as assessment tools. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Uses electronic media for presentations. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 24 of 63
CORRELATION TO THE GEORGIA PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
Subject Area: Language Arts State-Funded Course: Language Arts/Grade 7 Textbook Title: AMP Reading System, Level III (Turquoise) Publisher: Pearson Education
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
Reading and Literature
ELA7R1 The student demonstrates comprehension and shows evidence of a warranted and responsible explanation of a variety of literary and informational texts.
For literary texts, the student identifies the characteristics of various genres and produces evidence of reading that:
a. Distinguishes between the concepts of theme in a literary work and the author’s purpose in an expository text.
Throughout the AMP program, students preview, discuss, and review author purpose and theme. See examples: SG I: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24-28, 31-34, 37, 43, 46, 49, 52-53 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24-28, 31-34, 37, 43, 46, 49, 52-53 SG II: p. 54, 179 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, p. 54; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 13-16
b. Interprets a character’s traits, emotions, or motivations and gives supporting evidence from a text.
SG II: pp. 13, 16, 19, 22, 33, 123, 124 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 13, 16, 19, 22, 33; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 123, 124 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 101-105
Grade 7 Page 25 of 63
c. Relates a literary work to information about its setting or historical moment.
SG I: pp. 23, 24, 151, 153, 154, 160 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 23, 24; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 151, 153, 154,160 SG II: pp. 6, 24, 54, 62, 95, 98, 130, 139, 174, 180, 192 TE II: Unit 4: Test Structure, pp. 5, 24, 54; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 62, 95, 98; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 130, 139; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 174, 180, 192 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-17, 37-41, 61-65, 93-97
d. Analyzes recurring and similar themes across a variety of selections, distinguishing theme from topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Identifies events that advance the plot and determines how each event explains past or present action(s) or foreshadows future action(s).
SG I: p. 136 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, p. 136 SG II: pp. 13, 16, 19, 22, 33, 123, 124 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 13, 16, 19, 22, 33; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 123, 124 Assessment Masters, pp. 45-49, 93-97
f. Analyzes characterization (dynamic and static) in prose and plays as delineated through a character’s thoughts, words, speech patterns, and actions; the narrator’s description; and the thoughts, words, and actions of other characters.
SG II: pp. 13, 16, 19, 22, 33, 123, 124 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 13, 16, 19, 22, 33; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 123, 124 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 101-105
g. Explains and analyzes the effects of sound, form, figurative language, and graphics in order to uncover meaning in literature: i. Sound (e.g., alliteration, onomatopoeia, internal rhyme, rhyme scheme) ii. Figurative language (e.g., simile, metaphor, personification, and hyperbole) iii. Graphics (e.g., capital letters, line length, word position).
SG I: pp. 27, 61, 69 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 27; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 61, 69 SG II: pp. 5, 7, 10, 11, 17, 23, 26, 32, 38-39, 41, 47-49, 52-55, 173, 200-202, 205, 209 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5, 7, 10, 11, 17, 23, 26, 32, 38-39, 41, 47-49, 52-55; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 173, 200-202, 205, 209
Grade 7 Page 26 of 63
h. Identifies and analyzes how an author’s use of words creates tone and mood, giving supporting evidence from text.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Identifies and analyzes similarities and differences in traditional literature from different cultures.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
For informational texts, the student reads and comprehends in order to develop understanding and expertise and produces evidence of reading that:
a. Analyzes common textual features to obtain information (e.g., paragraphs, topic sentences, concluding sentences, introduction, conclusion, footnotes, index, bibliography).
Examples: SG I: pp. 6-7, 12, 19, 22, 24, 26-27, 38, 40, 53, 61, 69, 122, 135-136; Glossary pp. 169-172 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 6-7, 12, 19, 22, 24, 26-, 38, 40, 53; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 61, 69; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 122, 135-136 SG II: pp. 173, 179; Glossary pp. 225-229 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 173, 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 16, 23 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45; Math, pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45
b. Identifies and uses knowledge of common graphic features to draw conclusions and make judgments (e.g., graphic organizers, diagrams, captions, illustrations).
Examples: SG I: pp. 38-39, 61, 69, 82, 117, 138 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, p. 38-39; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 61, 69, 82, 117; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 138; Blackline Masters, pp. 179, 181, 183 SG II: pp. 26, 61-63, 66, 68, 72, 97-98, 102, 109, 111, 154, 173, 191, 200, 202, 205 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, p. 26; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 61-63, 66, 68, 72, 97-98, 102, 109, 111; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 202, 205; Blackline Masters, pp. 231-243 Assessment Masters: pp. 24, 89, 121 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 31, 46-48; Math pp. 30, 41-43
Grade 7 Page 27 of 63
c. Applies knowledge of common organizational structures and patterns (i.e., logical order, cause and effect relationships, comparison and contrast, transitions).
Examples: SG I: p. 131 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, p. 131 SG II: pp. 5, 11, 16-19, 32-34, 37, 40, 53, 88, 138-140, 143, 159, 165, 200 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5, 11, 16-19, 32-34, 37, 40, 53; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 88; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 138-140, 143, 159, 165; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 200; Blackline Masters, pp. 234-237 Assessment Masters: pp. 61-65, 69-73, 80
d. Recognizes and traces the development of the author’s argument for and against an issue.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Identifies evidence used to support an argument.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Understands and explains the use of a simple device by following technical directions.
TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-168D Assessment Masters: pp. 109-113
ELA7R2 The student understands and acquires new vocabulary and uses it correctly in reading and writing. The student
a. Determines the meaning of unfamiliar words using context clues (e.g., contrast, cause and effect, etc.).
SG I: pp. 106-107 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 106-107 SG II: pp. 20-21, 91-92, 132-133, 162-163 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 20-21; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 91-92; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 132-133, 162-163 In addition, in vocabulary exercises throughout, students use context to determine word choice. Assessment Masters: Vocabulary Assessments throughout. Examples on pp. 11- 12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 43-44, 51-52 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp 8-10
Grade 7 Page 28 of 63
b. Uses knowledge of Greek, Latin, and Anglo-Saxon roots and affixes to determine the meaning of unfamiliar words.
SG I: pp. 8-9, 35-36, 91-92, 147-148, 162-163 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 8-9, 35-36; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 91-92; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 147-148, 162-163 SG II: pp. 8-9, 64-65, 76-77, 120-121, 203-204, 218-219 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-9; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65, 76-77; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121; Unit 7: Metacognition: pp. 203-204, 218-219 Assessment Masters: Examples on pp. 44, 52, 92, 116 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: p. 10
c. Identifies and explains idioms and analogies in prose and poetry.
SG I: pp. 50-51, 76-77 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 50-51; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 76-77 SG II: pp. 106-107 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 106-107 Assessment Masters: p. 28
d. Determines word meanings through the use of definition, example, restatement, or contrast.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees an example of it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level III. Examples: SG I: pp. 2-3, 8-9, 14-15, 20-21 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 2-3, 8-9, 14-15, 20-21 SG II: pp. 2-3, 8-9, 14-15, 20-21 TE I: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 2-3, 8-9, 14-15, 20-21 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: See examples on pp. 11, 19, 27, 35, 43, 51, 59, 67, 75, 83, 91, 99, 107, 115
ELA7R3 The student reads aloud, accurately (in the range of 95%), familiar material in a variety of genres, in a way that makes meaning clear to listeners. The student
Grade 7 Page 29 of 63
a. Uses letter-sound knowledge to decode written English and uses a range of cueing systems (e.g., phonics and context clues) to determine pronunciation and meaning.
Examples: SG I: pp. 2-3, 29-30, 58-59, 100-101, 126-127 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 2-3, 29-30; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 58-59, 100- 101; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 126-127 SG II: pp. 14-15, 20, 44-45, 70-71, 85-86, 162 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 14-15, 20, 44-45; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 70- 71, 85-86; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 162 Assessment Masters: pp. 19, 28, 35-36, 51-52, 67-68
b. Uses self-correction when subsequent reading indicates an earlier miscue (self-monitoring and self-correcting strategies).
Students complete multiple activities dealing with any given reading, allowing them to revisit the reading material and clarify their analysis. In particular, predicting and inferencing activities encourage students to skim or quickly read passages, make predictions or analyze the reading, then reread for accuracy. See: SG I: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 SG II: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 53-57, 93-97, 101-105
Grade 7 Page 30 of 63
c. Reads with a rhythm, flow, and meter that sounds like everyday speech (prosody).
Explicit instruction in oral reading fluency to improve reading achievement is included throughout the AMP program. See for example, instruction on: • Relaxed reading (SG II: pp. • Natural Breaks (SG II: pp. 181, 190, 192, 222) • Pace (SG I: pp. 42, 49, 54-55, 102, 104-105, 110-111; SG II: pp. 54, 105, 145, 160, 214, 217, 220, 223) • Pauses (SG I: pp. 46, 72, 139, 149, 167); SG II: pp. 4, 13, 37, 52, 55, 62, 66, 95, 102 Students reread, in pairs or in groups, each of the passages in the Student Guides and are guided to carry out their daily independent reading fluently. Through teacher modeling, direct instruction, and tips, students focus on each of the aspects of fluency in each Student Guide unit. A Fluency tip appears with each passage in the Student Guide and is elaborated on in the Teacher’s Edition with suggestions for instruction, modeling, and practice. In addition, with the AMP Reading Online Library, students can repeatedly hear and read along with models of fluent reading.
Reading Across the Curriculum
ELA7RC1 The student reads a minimum of 25 grade-level appropriate books or book equivalents (approximately 1,000,000 words) per year from a variety of subject disciplines. The student reads both informational and fictional texts in a variety of genres and modes of discourse, including technical texts related to various subject areas.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books that correspond to the seven Student Guide units. Each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. Eighty-five percent of the selections are nonfiction. AMP Reading System Level III includes the following: • “Nature’s Fury” (geography, earth science, history, health/medicine, social studies) • “High-Tech Crime Fighters” (forensic science, chemistry, biology, anatomy, art, computer science, history, biography) • “Out of Control” (biology, ecology, history, health/medicine) • “Ancient Lives Unveiled” (historical fiction, history, social studies, film) • “Making Movies” (film, art, biography, history) • “Terrific Teams” (sports, geography, social studies, health/medicine, fiction) • “Medical Miracles” (health/medicine, career education, history, engineering, bioengineering) In addition, Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
Grade 7 Page 31 of 63
ELA7RC2 The student participates in discussions related to curricular learning in all subject areas. The student
a. Identifies messages and themes from books in all subject areas.
SG I: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24-28, 31-34, 37, 43, 46, 49, 52-53 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24-28, 31-34, 37, 43, 46, 49, 52-53 SG II: p. 54, 179 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, p. 54; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 13-16
b. Responds to a variety of texts in multiple modes of discourse.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books that correspond to the seven Student Guide units. Each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. Eighty-five percent of the selections are nonfiction. AMP Reading System Level III includes the following: • “Nature’s Fury” (geography, earth science, history, health/medicine, social studies) • “High-Tech Crime Fighters” (forensic science, chemistry, biology, anatomy, art, computer science, history, biography) • “Out of Control” (biology, ecology, history, health/medicine) • “Ancient Lives Unveiled” (historical fiction, history, social studies, film) • “Making Movies” (film, art, biography, history) • “Terrific Teams” (sports, geography, social studies, health/medicine, fiction) • “Medical Miracles” (health/medicine, career education, history, engineering, bioengineering) Students respond to these texts by summarizing, questioning, predicting, analyzing structure, visualizing, inferencing, and applying Metacognition skills. In addition, Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
Grade 7 Page 32 of 63
c. Relates messages and themes from one subject area to those in another area.
In several units, students relate information from their own experience to the subject of the text they are reading to enhance their understanding of messages and themes. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 4, 10, 49, 84, 158, 167 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, p. 4, 10, 49; Unit 2: Questioning, p. 84, Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 158, 167 SG I: pp. 10, 16, 43, 128, 137, 143, 155 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 10, 16, 43; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 128, 137, 143 Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts also aid students in relating readings to social studies, science, and math.
d. Evaluates the merits of texts in every subject discipline.
Students assess the merits and relevance of a wide range of texts and apply ideas from them in “After You Read” prompts throughout. See examples: SG I: pp. 16, 22, 31, 34, 40, 43, 46, 55, 63, 66, 81, 87 SG II: pp. 19, 25, 34, 46, 63, 69, 87, 93, 102, 105, 122
e. Examines the author’s purpose in writing. Examples: SG I: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24, 26-27, 38, 40, 53 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24, 26-27, 30, 40, 53 SG II: p. 54, 173, 179 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, p. 54; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 173, 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 13-16
f. Recognizes and uses the features of disciplinary texts (e.g., charts, graphs, photos, maps, highlighted vocabulary).
Examples: SG I: pp. 26-27, 82, 117, 118, 135, 138, 139 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 26-27; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 82; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117, 118, 135, 138, 139 SG II: pp. 61-63, 66, 68, 72, 109, 110 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 61-63, 66, 68, 72, 109, 110 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp.32-36
Grade 7 Page 33 of 63
ELA7RC3 The student acquires new vocabulary in each content area and uses it correctly. The student
a. Demonstrates an understanding of contextual vocabulary in various subjects.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level II. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary exercises analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 39-40, 43-44
b. Uses content vocabulary in writing and speaking.
In vocabulary lessons throughout, students write their own sentences using or responding to vocabulary words. See examples: SG I: pp. 21, 36, 45, 86, 92, 107, 115, 121, 133 SG II: pp. 9, 15, 36, 45, 51, 59, 71, 86, 101, 115 Additionally, teaching tips in the TE encourage teachers to have students collaborate on ideas for writing sentences and to volunteer and discuss their sentences. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 15, 21, 36, 45 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 3, 9, 15, 30, 45
c. Explores understanding of new words found in subject area texts.
SG I/II: Vocabulary exercises throughout the Student Guides focus on words that are found in the subject area reading assignments. In addition to previously noted strategies, students also explore synonyms and antonyms, how prefixes and suffixes change a base word, parts of speech, analogies, shades of meaning, word families, word origins, idioms, connotation and denotation, and so on. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78, 106-109 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52; Unit II: Questioning, pp. 64- 66, 76-78, 106-109 SG II: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-66, 76-78 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10
Grade 7 Page 34 of 63
ELA7RC4 The student establishes a context for information acquired by reading across subject areas. The student
a. Explores life experiences related to subject area content.
“After You Read” and “Beyond the Text” questions help students relate personal life experiences to the subject area content. See examples: SG I: pp. 4, 13, 37, 72, 116, 128, 152 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 4, 13, 37; Unit 2: Questioning: pp. 72; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 116, 128, 152 SG II: pp. 4, 10, 16, 22, 28, 43, 60, 72, 81, 90, 96, 99 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 10, 16, 22, 28, 43; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 60, 72, 81, 90, 96, 99
b. Discusses in both writing and speaking how certain words and concepts relate to multiple subjects.
Many of the reading materials apply one idea to several subjects. For example, information in ““Nature’s Fury” (Unit 1: Summarizing) is related to geography, earth science, history, health/medicine, and social studies Likewise, information in the reader “Ancient Lives Unveiled” (Unit 4: Visualizing) is related to historical fiction, history, social studies, and film.
c. Determines strategies for finding content and contextual meaning for unfamiliar words or concepts.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level III. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary words exercises analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 39-40, 43-44
Writing
The student writes clear, coherent text that develops a central idea or tells a story. The writing shows consideration of the audience and purpose. The student progresses through the stages of the writing process (e.g., prewriting, drafting, revising, and editing successive versions).
Grade 7 Page 35 of 63
ELA7W1 The student produces writing that establishes an appropriate organizational structure, sets a context and engages the reader, maintains a coherent focus throughout, and provides a satisfying closure. The student
a. Selects a focus, an organizational structure, and a point of view based on purpose, genre expectations, audience, length, and format requirements.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
b. Writes texts of a length appropriate to address the topic or tell the story.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Uses traditional structures for conveying information (e.g., chronological order, cause and effect, similarity and difference, and posing and answering a question).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
d. Uses appropriate structures to ensure coherence (e.g., transition elements).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-G; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-230
e. Supports statements and claims with anecdotes, descriptions, facts and statistics, and specific examples.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
ELA7W2 The student demonstrates competence in a variety of genres.
The student produces a narrative (fictional, personal, experiential) that:
a. Engages readers by establishing and developing a plot, setting, and point of view that are appropriate to the story (e.g., varied beginnings, standard plot line, cohesive devices, and a sharpened focus).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G
b. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
Grade 7 Page 36 of 63
c. Develops characters using standard methods of characterization.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Includes sensory details and concrete language to develop plot, setting, and character (e.g., vivid verbs, descriptive adjectives, and varied sentence structures).
The use of sensory words in covered in: SG II, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109, 206-208 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 206-208
e. Excludes extraneous details and inconsistencies.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Uses a range of strategies (e.g., suspense, figurative language, dialogue, expanded vocabulary, flashback, movement, gestures, expressions, tone, and mood).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F
The student produces writing (multi-paragraph expository composition such as description, explanation, comparison and contrast, or problem and solution) that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Develops a controlling idea that conveys a perspective on the subject.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
d. Develops the topic with supporting details. TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
e. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226
Grade 7 Page 37 of 63
f. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
g. Concludes with a detailed summary linked to the purpose of the composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
The student produces technical writing (business correspondence: memoranda, emails, letters of inquiry, letters of complaint, instructions and procedures, lab reports, slide presentations) that:
a. Creates or follows an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Applies rules of Standard English. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a response to literature that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, or otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Demonstrates an understanding of the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Organizes an interpretation around several clear ideas, premises, or images from the original work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Supports a judgment through references to the text and personal knowledge.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 38 of 63
e. Justifies interpretations through sustained use of examples and textual evidence from the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a multi-paragraph persuasive essay that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. States a clear position or perspective in support of a proposition or proposal.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Describes the points in support of the proposition, employing well-articulated, relevant evidence.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Excludes information and arguments that are irrelevant.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to a specific purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Anticipates and addresses readers’ concerns and counter-arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA7W3 The student uses research and technology to support writing. The student
a. Identifies topics, asks and evaluates questions, and develops ideas leading to inquiry, investigation, and research.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Gives credit for both quoted and paraphrased information in a bibliography by using a consistent and sanctioned format and methodology for citations.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 7 Page 39 of 63
c. Includes researched information in different types of products (e.g., compositions, multimedia presentations, graphic organizers, projects, etc.).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Documents sources. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Uses electronic media to locate relevant information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA7W4 The student consistently uses the writing process to develop, revise, and evaluate writing. The student
a. Plans and drafts independently and resourcefully.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112CF; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Uses strategies of note taking, outlining, and summarizing to impose structure on composition drafts.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Revises manuscripts to improve the organization and consistency of ideas within and between paragraphs.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
d. Edits writing to improve word choice after checking the precision of the vocabulary.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Conventions
ELA7C1 The student demonstrates understanding and control of the rules of the English language, realizing that usage involves the appropriate application of conventions and grammar in both written and spoken formats. The student
a. Identifies and writes simple, compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences correctly, punctuating properly, avoiding fragments and run-ons, adding or deleting modifiers, combining or revising sentences.
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56C-E; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
Grade 7 Page 40 of 63
b. Identifies and writes correctly punctuated adjective and adverb clauses.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Uses standard subject-verb and pronoun-antecedent agreement.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Identifies and uses verb tenses consistently (simple and perfect).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Demonstrates correct usage of comparative and superlative forms of adjectives and adverbs.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Demonstrates appropriate comma and semicolon usage (compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences, and split dialogue).
TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 172-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
g. Distinguishes differences in meaning and spelling of commonly confused homonyms.
SG II: 132-133, 147-148 TE I: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 132-133, 147-148
h. Produces final drafts/presentations that demonstrate accurate spelling and the correct use of punctuation and capitalization.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Listening/Speaking/Viewing
ELA7LSV1 The student participates in student-to-teacher, student-to-student, and group verbal interactions. The student
a. Initiates new topics in addition to responding to adult-initiated topics.
Many oral language activities throughout TE I/II encourage student-initiated topics, particularly “Engage Students” and “After Students Read” sections. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 10, 11, 13, 19, 25, 49, 52 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 7, 10, 11, 13, 43, 55
b. Asks relevant questions. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Responds to questions with appropriate information.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 63, 64, 67, 68, 69, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 116, 117, 123, 124, 125, 130, 135, 136, 137
Grade 7 Page 41 of 63
d. Confirms understanding by paraphrasing the adult’s directions or suggestions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Displays appropriate turn-taking behaviors. Students take turns with partners or in small groups to read aloud, analyze, discuss, etc. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 116, 118, 124, 125, 128, 130, 134, 136, 145
f. Actively solicits another person’s comments or opinions.
Students are directed to discuss readings, interpretations, predictions, and so on. Such discussion implies soliciting and considering another’s comments and opinions. See examples: TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 128, 129, 131, 137, 146, 147, 152, 155, 158, 161, 164
g. Offers own opinion forcefully without domineering.
Students have many opportunities to share their opinions in the course of class discussion. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 122, 134, 140, 146, 152 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 131, 135, 137, 165
h. Responds appropriately to comments and questions.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 63, 64, 67, 68, 69, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 116, 117, 123, 124, 125, 130, 135, 136, 137
i. Volunteers contributions and responds when directly solicited by teacher or discussion leader.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 63, 64, 67, 68, 69, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 116, 117, 123, 124, 125, 130, 135, 136, 137
j. Gives reasons in support of opinions expressed.
Throughout SG?TE I/II. See examples: SGI/TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 122, 134, 140, 146, 152 SGI/TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 131, 135, 137, 165
k. Clarifies, illustrates, or expands on a response when asked to do so.
Throughout SG/TE I/II. See examples: SG I/TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 66, 72, 73, 78, 99 SG II/TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 66, 69, 78, 81, 87
l. Employs a group decision-making technique such as brainstorming or a problem solving sequence (e.g., recognizes problem, defines problem, identifies possible solutions, selects optimal solution, implements solution, evaluates solution).
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 73, 78, 94, 95, 97 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22
Grade 7 Page 42 of 63
m. Develops an outline that highlights the important issues discussed.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA7LSV2 The student listens to and views various forms of text and media in order to gather and share information, persuade others, and express and understand ideas. The student will select and critically analyze messages using rubrics as assessment tools.
When responding to visual and oral texts and media (e.g., television, radio, film productions, and electronic media), the student:
a. Analyzes the effect on the viewer of image, text, and sound in electronic journalism.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Identifies the techniques used to achieve the effects studied in each instance. When delivering and responding to presentations, the student:
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
When delivering or responding to presentations, the student:
a. Gives oral presentations or dramatic interpretations for various purposes.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Organizes information to achieve particular purposes and to appeal to the background and interests of the audience.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Shows appropriate changes in delivery (e.g., gestures, vocabulary, pace, visuals).
Examples: SG I: pp. 10, 37, 39-40, 42-43, 49, 85, 99, 104, 108 TE I: Unit 1, pp. 10, 37, 39-40, 42-43, 49; Unit 2, Questioning, pp. 85, 99, 104, 1008 SG II: pp. 6, 7, 10, 19, 28, 33, 34, 42, 43, 54, 105, 108, 111, 134, 137 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 6, 7, 10, 19, 28, 33, 34, 42, 43, 54; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 105, 108, 111; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 134, 137
Grade 7 Page 43 of 63
d. Uses language for dramatic effect. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Uses rubrics as assessment tools. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Responds to oral communications with questions, challenges, or affirmations.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Uses multimedia in presentations. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 44 of 63
CORRELATION TO THE GEORGIA PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
Subject Area: Language Arts State-Funded Course: Language Arts/Grade 8 Textbook Title: AMP Reading System, Level III (Turquoise)__________________________ Publisher: Pearson
Standard (Cite Number)
Standard (Cite specific standard)
Where Taught (If print component, cite page number; if non-print, cite appropriate location.)
Reading and Literature
ELA8R1 The student demonstrates comprehension and shows evidence of a warranted and responsible explanation of a variety of literary and informational texts.
For literary texts, the student identifies the characteristics of various genres and produces evidence of reading that:
a. Identifies the difference between the concepts of theme in a literary work and author’s purpose in an expository text.
Throughout the AMP program, students preview, discuss, and review author purpose and theme. See examples: SG I: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24-28, 31-34, 37, 43, 46, 49, 52-53 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp.11-13,17-19,22,24-28, 31-34, 37,43,46, 49, 52-53 SG II: p. 54, 179 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, p. 54; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 13-16
b. Compares and contrasts genre characteristics from two or more selections of literature.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Analyzes a character’s traits, emotions, or motivations and gives supporting evidence from the text(s).
SG II: pp. 13, 16, 19, 22, 33, 123, 124 TE II: Unit 4:Text Structure, pp.13, 16, 19, 22, 33; Unit 6:Inferencing, pp. 123, 124 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 101-105
Grade 8 Page 45 of 63
d. Compares and contrasts motivations and reactions of literary characters from different historical eras confronting similar situations or conflicts.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Evaluates recurring or similar themes across a variety of selections, distinguishing theme from topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Evaluates the structural elements of the plot (e.g., subplots, climax), the plot’s development, and the way in which conflicts are (or are not) addressed and resolved.
SG I: p. 136 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, p. 136 SG II: pp. 13, 16, 19, 22, 33, 123, 124 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 13, 16, 19, 22, 33; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 123, 124 Assessment Masters, pp. 45-49, 93-97
g. Analyzes and evaluates the effects of sound, form, figurative language, and graphics in order to uncover meaning in literature:
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Sound (e.g., alliteration, onomatopoeia, internal rhyme, rhyme scheme, meter)
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ii. Figurative language (e.g., simile, metaphor, personification, hyperbole, symbolism, imagery).
SG II: pp. 67, 73-74, 78, 109-110, 206-209 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67, 73-74, 78, 109-110; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 206-209 Assessment Masters: pp. 80, 81, 88, 120
h. Analyzes and evaluates how an author’s use of words creates tone and mood and provides supporting details from text.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
For informational texts, the student reads and comprehends in order to develop understanding and expertise and produces evidence of reading that:
Grade 8 Page 46 of 63
a. Analyzes and evaluates common textual features (e.g., paragraphs, topic sentences, concluding sentences, introduction, conclusion, footnotes, index, bibliography).
Examples: SG I: pp. 6-7, 12, 19, 22, 24, 26-27, 38, 40, 53, 61, 69, 122, 135-136; Glossary pp. 169-172 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 6-7, 12, 19, 22, 24, 26-, 38, 40, 53; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 61, 69; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 122, 135-136 SG II: pp. 173, 179; Glossary pp. 225-229 TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 173, 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 16, 23 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45; Math, pp. 13-16, 28-31, 43-45
b. Applies, analyzes, and evaluates common organizational structures (e.g., graphic organizers, logical order, cause and effect relationships, comparison and contrast).
Examples: SG I: p. 131 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, p. 131 SG II: pp. 5, 11, 16-19, 32-34, 37, 40, 53, 88, 138-140, 143, 159, 165, 200 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 5, 11, 16-19, 32-34, 37, 40, 53; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 88; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 138-140, 143, 159, 165; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 200; Blackline Masters, pp. 234-237 Assessment Masters: pp. 61-65, 69-73, 80
c. Recognizes and traces the development of an author’s argument, point of view, or perspective in text.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Understands and explains the use of a complex mechanical device by following technical directions.
See related material in TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-168D Assessment Masters: pp. 109-113
e. Uses information from a variety of consumer, workplace, and public documents (e.g., job applications) to explain a situation or decision and to solve a problem.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 47 of 63
ELA8R2 The student understands and acquires new vocabulary and uses it correctly in reading and writing. The student
a. Determines pronunciations, meanings, alternate word choices, parts of speech, or etymologies of words.
See the following examples: SG I: pp. 8-10, 44-45, 64-65, 91-92, 100-102, 126-127, 132-133, 147-148 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 8-10, 44-45; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 64-65, 91-92, 100-102; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 126-127, 132-133, 147-148 SG II: pp. 2-3, 8-9, 35-36, 64-65, 76-77, 91-92, 120-121, 176-177 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 2-3, 8-9, 35-36; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-65, 76-77, 91-92; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 120-121, 147-148; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 176-177 Assessment Masters: pp. 20, 27, 36, 76, 84, 92, 100
b. Determines the meaning of unfamiliar words in content and context specific to reading and writing.
SG I: pp. 106-107 TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 106-107 SG II: pp. 20-21, 91-92, 132-133, 162-163 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 20-21; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 91-92; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 132-133, 162-163 In vocabulary exercises throughout, students use context to determine word choice. Assessment Masters: Vocabulary Assessments throughout. Examples on pp. 11- 12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 43-44, 51-52 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp 8-10
c. Demonstrates an initial understanding of the history of the English Language.
SG I: pp. 35-36 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 35-36 SG II: pp. 8-9, 176-177 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-9; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 176-177 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: p. 10
ELA8R3 The student reads aloud, accurately (in the range of 95%), familiar material in a variety of genres, in a way that makes meaning clear to listeners. The student
Grade 8 Page 48 of 63
a. Uses letter-sound knowledge to decode written English and uses a range of cueing systems (e.g., phonics and context clues) to determine pronunciation and meaning.
Examples: SG I: pp. 2-3, 29-30, 58-59, 100-101, 126-127 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 2-3, 29-30; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 58-59, 100- 101; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 126-127 SG II: pp. 14-15, 20, 44-45, 70-71, 85-86, 162 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 14-15, 20, 44-45; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 70- 71, 85-86; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 162 Assessment Masters: pp. 19, 28, 35-36, 51-52, 67-68
b. Uses self-correction when subsequent reading indicates an earlier miscue (self-monitoring and self-correcting strategies).
Students complete multiple activities dealing with any given reading, allowing them to revisit the reading material and clarify their analysis. In particular, predicting and inferencing activities encourage students to skim or quickly read passages, make predictions or analyze the reading, then reread for accuracy. See: SG I: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 SG II: pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 117-119, 123-125, 129-131, 135-140, 144-146, 150-155, 159-161, 165-167 Assessment Masters: pp. 45-49, 53-57, 93-97, 101-105
Grade 8 Page 49 of 63
c. Reads with a rhythm, flow, and meter that sounds like everyday speech (prosody).
Explicit instruction in oral reading fluency to improve reading achievement is included throughout the AMP program. See for example, instruction on: • Relaxed reading (SG II: pp. • Natural Breaks (SG II: pp. 181, 190, 192, 222) • Pace (SG I: pp. 42, 49, 54-55, 102, 104-105, 110-111; SG II: pp. 54, 105, 145, 160, 214, 217, 220, 223) • Pauses (SG I: pp. 46, 72, 139, 149, 167); SG II: pp. 4, 13, 37, 52, 55, 62, 66, 95, 102 Students reread, in pairs or in groups, each of the passages in the Student Guides and are guided to carry out their daily independent reading fluently. Through teacher modeling, direct instruction, and tips, students focus on each of the aspects of fluency in each Student Guide unit. A Fluency tip appears with each passage in the Student Guide and is elaborated on in the Teacher’s Edition with suggestions for instruction, modeling, and practice. In addition, with the AMP Reading Online Library, students can repeatedly hear and read along with models of fluent reading.
ELA8R4 The student acquires knowledge of Georgia authors and significant text created by them. The student
a. Identifies a variety of Georgia authors both male and female.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Identifies authors’ connections to Georgia through a variety of materials including electronic media.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Identifies award winning Georgia authors. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Examines texts from different genres (e.g. picture books, poetry, short stories, novels, essays, informational writing, and dramatic literature) created by Georgia authors.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Relates literary works created by Georgia authors to historical settings and or events.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 50 of 63
f. Explains how Georgia is reflected in a literary work through setting, characterization, historical context, or current events.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Evaluates recurring or similar themes across a variety of selections written by Georgia authors, distinguishing theme from topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Reading Across the Curriculum
ELA8RC1 The student reads a minimum of 25 grade-level appropriate books or book equivalents (approximately 1,000,000 words) per year from a variety of subject disciplines. The student reads both informational and fictional texts in a variety of genres and modes of discourse, including technical texts related to various subject areas.
ELA8RC2 The student participates in discussions related to curricular learning in all subject areas. The student
a. Identifies messages and themes from books in all subject areas.
SG I: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24-28, 31-34, 37, 43, 46, 49, 52-53 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24-28, 31-34, 37, 43, 46, 49, 52-53 SG II: p. 54, 179 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, p. 54; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 13-16
Grade 8 Page 51 of 63
b. Responds to a variety of texts in multiple modes of discourse.
Each level of the AMP System includes seven books that correspond to the seven Student Guide units. Each book contains two full-length selections on high-interest topics. Eighty-five percent of the selections are nonfiction. AMP Reading System Level III includes the following: • “Nature’s Fury” (geography, earth science, history, health/medicine, social studies) • “High-Tech Crime Fighters” (forensic science, chemistry, biology, anatomy, art, computer science, history, biography) • “Out of Control” (biology, ecology, history, health/medicine) • “Ancient Lives Unveiled” (historical fiction, history, social studies, film) • “Making Movies” (film, art, biography, history) • “Terrific Teams” (sports, geography, social studies, health/medicine, fiction) • “Medical Miracles” (health/medicine, career education, history, engineering, bioengineering) Students respond to these texts by summarizing, questioning, predicting, analyzing structure, visualizing, inferencing, and applying Metacognition skills. In addition, Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts provide content-area applications of comprehension strategies in math, social studies, and science.
c. Relates messages and themes from one subject area to those in another area.
In several units, students relate information from their own experience to the subject of the text they are reading to enhance their understanding of messages and themes. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 4, 10, 49, 84, 158, 167 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, p. 4, 10, 49; Unit 2: Questioning, p. 84, Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 158, 167 SG I: pp. 10, 16, 43, 128, 137, 143, 155 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 10, 16, 43; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 128, 137, 143 Customized Reading Strategies supplemental texts also aid students in relating readings to social studies, science, and math.
Grade 8 Page 52 of 63
d. Evaluates the merits of texts in every subject discipline.
Students assess the merits and relevance of a wide range of texts and apply ideas from them in “After You Read” prompts throughout. See examples: SG I: pp. 16, 22, 31, 34, 40, 43, 46, 55, 63, 66, 81, 87 SG II: pp. 19, 25, 34, 46, 63, 69, 87, 93, 102, 105, 122
e. Examines the author’s purpose in writing. Examples: SG I: pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24, 26-27, 38, 40, 53 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 11-13, 17-19, 22, 24, 26-27, 30, 40, 53 SG II: p. 54, 173, 179 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, p. 54; Unit 7: Metacognition, p. 173, 179 Assessment Masters: pp. 13-18, 21-26 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp. 13-16
f. Recognizes and uses the features of disciplinary texts (e.g., charts, graphs, photos, maps, highlighted vocabulary).
Examples: SG I: pp. 26-27, 82, 117, 118, 135, 138, 139 TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 26-27; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 82; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 117, 118, 135, 138, 139 SG II: pp. 61-63, 66, 68, 72, 109, 110 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 61-63, 66, 68, 72, 109, 110 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Studies, Science, Math: pp.32-36
ELA8RC3 The student acquires new vocabulary in each content area and uses it correctly. The student
a. Demonstrates an understanding of contextual vocabulary in various subjects.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level II. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary exercises analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 39-40, 43-44
Grade 8 Page 53 of 63
b. Uses content vocabulary in writing and speaking.
In vocabulary lessons throughout, students write their own sentences using or responding to vocabulary words. See examples: SG I: pp. 21, 36, 45, 86, 92, 107, 115, 121, 133 SG II: pp. 9, 15, 36, 45, 51, 59, 71, 86, 101, 115 Additionally, teaching tips in the TE encourage teachers to have students collaborate on ideas for writing sentences and to volunteer and discuss their sentences. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 15, 21, 36, 45 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 3, 9, 15, 30, 45
c. Explores understanding of new words found in subject area texts.
SG I/II: Vocabulary exercises throughout the Student Guides focus on words that are found in the subject area reading assignments. In addition to previously noted strategies, students also explore synonyms and antonyms, how prefixes and suffixes change a base word, parts of speech, analogies, shades of meaning, word families, word origins, idioms, connotation and denotation, and so on. See the following examples: SG I: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78, 106-109 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 50-52; Unit II: Questioning, pp. 64- 66, 76-78, 106-109 SG II: pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52, 64-66, 76-78 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 8-10, 20-22, 35-37, 50-52; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 64-66, 76-78 Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10
ELA8RC4 The student establishes a context for information acquired by reading across subject areas. The student
a. Explores life experiences related to subject area content.
“After You Read” and “Beyond the Text” questions help students relate personal life experiences to the subject area content. See examples: SG I: pp. 4, 13, 37, 72, 116, 128, 152 TE I: Unit I: Summarizing, pp. 4, 13, 37; Unit 2: Questioning: pp. 72; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 116, 128, 152 SG II: pp. 4, 10, 16, 22, 28, 43, 60, 72, 81, 90, 96, 99 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 10, 16, 22, 28, 43; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 60, 72, 81, 90, 96, 99
Grade 8 Page 54 of 63
b. Discusses in both writing and speaking how certain words and concepts relate to multiple subjects.
Many of the reading materials apply one idea to several subjects. For example, information in ““Nature’s Fury” (Unit 1: Summarizing) is related to geography, earth science, history, health/medicine, and social studies Likewise, information in the reader “Ancient Lives Unveiled” (Unit 4: Visualizing) is related to historical fiction, history, social studies, and film.
c. Determines strategies for finding content and contextual meaning for unfamiliar words or concepts.
SG I /II and TE I /II: Typical vocabulary instruction begins with a vocabulary exercise in which the student learns the definition of a word, sees it used in context, then writes a sentence of their own using the word. Additional exercises using the vocabulary words are included throughout the Unit. There are eight vocabulary lessons in each of the seven units of AMP Level III. Customized Reading Strategies: Social Science, Science, Math: pp. 8-10 Assessment Masters: Vocabulary words exercises analyze word meaning in context. See pp. 11-12, 19-20, 27-28, 35-36, 39-40, 43-44
Writing
ELA8W1 The student produces writing that establishes an appropriate organizational structure, sets a context and engages the reader, maintains a coherent focus throughout, and signals a satisfying closure. The student
a. Selects a focus, organizational structure, and a point of view based on purpose, genre expectations, audience, length, and format requirements.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
b. Writes texts of a length appropriate to address the topic or tell the story.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Uses traditional structures for conveying information (e.g., chronological order, cause and effect, similarity and difference, and posing and answering a question).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
Grade 8 Page 55 of 63
d. Uses appropriate structures to ensure coherence (e.g., transition elements, parallel structure).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-G; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-230
e. Supports statements and claims with anecdotes, descriptions, facts and statistics, and specific examples.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
ELA8W2 The student demonstrates competence in a variety of genres.
The student produces a narrative (fictional, personal, experiential) that:
a. Engages readers by establishing and developing a plot, setting, and point of view that are appropriate to the story (e.g., varied beginnings, standard plot line, cohesive devices, and a sharpened focus).
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G
b. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112C-G; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
c. Relates a clear, coherent incident, event, or situation by using well-chosen details.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-G
d. Reveals the significance of the writer’s attitude about the subject.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Develops complex major and minor characters using standard methods of characterization.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Includes sensory details and concrete language to develop plot, setting, and character (e.g., vivid verbs, descriptive adjectives, varied sentence structures, and specific narrative action).
The use of sensory words in covered in: SG II, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109, 206-208 TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 67, 73-75, 78, 109; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 206-208
g. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 56 of 63
h. Uses a range of strategies (e.g., suspense, figurative language, dialogue, expanded vocabulary, flashback, movement, gestures, expressions, foreshadowing, tone, and mood).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Provides a sense of closure appropriate to the writing.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F
The student produces writing (multi-paragraph expository composition such as description, explanation, comparison and contrast, or problem and solution) that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
b. Develops a controlling idea that conveys a perspective on the subject.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Creates an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
d. Develops the topic with supporting details. TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
e. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
TE II: Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226
f. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
g. Concludes with a detailed summary linked to the purpose of the composition.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112E-F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 226-229
The student produces technical writing (business correspondence: letters of application and letters of recommendation, résumés, abstracts, user guides or manuals, web pages).
Grade 8 Page 57 of 63
a. Creates or follows an organizing structure appropriate to purpose, audience, and context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Excludes extraneous and inappropriate information.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Follows an organizational pattern appropriate to the type of composition.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Applies rules of Standard English. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a response to literature that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, or otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Demonstrates an understanding of the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Supports a judgment through references to the text and personal knowledge.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Justifies interpretations through sustained use of examples and textual evidence from the literary work.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Supports a judgment through references to the text, references to other works, authors, or non-print media, or references to personal knowledge.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Produces a judgment that is interpretive, analytic, evaluative, or reflective (orally, graphically, in writing).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Anticipates and answers a reader’s questions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 58 of 63
The student produces a multi-paragraph persuasive essay that:
a. Engages the reader by establishing a context, creating a speaker’s voice, and otherwise developing reader interest.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. States a clear position or perspective in support of a proposition or proposal.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Creates an organizing structure that is appropriate to the needs, values, and interests of a specified audience, and arranges details, reasons, and examples.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Includes appropriate relevant information and arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Excludes information and arguments that are irrelevant.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Provides details, reasons, and examples, arranging them effectively by anticipating and answering reader concerns and counter-arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Supports arguments with detailed evidence, citing sources of information as appropriate.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Anticipates and addresses reader concerns and counter-arguments.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
The student produces a piece of writing drawn from research that:
a. Poses relevant and tightly drawn questions about the topic.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Engages the reader by establishing a context.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
Grade 8 Page 59 of 63
c. Conveys clear and accurate perspectives on the subject.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. States a thesis. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Records important ideas, concepts, and direct quotations from significant information sources, and paraphrases and summarizes all perspectives on the topic, as appropriate.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Uses a variety of primary and secondary sources and distinguishes the nature and value of each.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Organizes and displays information on charts, maps, and graphs.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
h. Provides a sense of closure to the writing. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
i. Documents resources (bibliography, footnotes, endnotes, etc.).
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA8W3 The student uses research and technology to support writing. The student
a. Plans and conducts multiple-step information searches by using computer networks and modems.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Achieves an effective balance between researched information and original ideas.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Avoids plagiarism. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA8W4 The student consistently uses the writing process to develop, revise, and evaluate writing. The student
a. Plans and drafts independently and resourcefully.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112CF; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168C-F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Grade 8 Page 60 of 63
b. Revises writing for appropriate organization, consistent point of view, and transitions between paragraphs, passages, and ideas.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
c. Edits writing to improve word choice, grammar, punctuation, etc.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Conventions
ELA8C1 The student demonstrates understanding and control of the rules of the English language, realizing that usage involves the appropriate application of conventions and grammar in both written and spoken formats. The student
a. Declines pronouns by gender and case, and demonstrates correct usage in sentences.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Analyzes and uses simple, compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences correctly, punctuates properly, and avoids fragments and run-ons.
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56C-E; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
c. Revises sentences by correcting misplaced and dangling modifiers.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
d. Revises sentences by correcting errors in usage.
TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, p. 170-173
e. Demonstrates appropriate comma and semicolon usage (compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences, split dialogue, and for clarity).
TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 172-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structures, pp. 56C-F
f. Analyzes the structure of a sentence (basic sentence parts, noun-adjective adverb clauses and phrases).
TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 56C-E; Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 112C-E; Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 170-173 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 56E-G
Grade 8 Page 61 of 63
g. Produces final drafts/presentations that demonstrate accurate spelling and the correct use of punctuation and capitalization.
TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 112D, F; Unit 6: Inferencing, p. 168D, E, F; Unit 7: Metacognition, pp. 228-229
Listening/Speaking/Viewing
ELA8LSV1 The student participates in student-to-teacher, student-to-student, and group verbal interactions. The student
a. Initiates new topics in addition to responding to adult-initiated topics.
Many oral language activities throughout TE I/II encourage student-initiated topics, particularly “Engage Students” and “After Students Read” sections. See examples: TE I: Unit 1: Summarizing, pp. 10, 11, 13, 19, 25, 49, 52 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 4, 7, 10, 11, 13, 43, 55
b. Asks relevant questions. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Responds to questions with appropriate information.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 63, 64, 67, 68, 69, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 116, 117, 123, 124, 125, 130, 135, 136, 137
d. Confirms understanding by paraphrasing the adult’s directions or suggestions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Displays appropriate turn-taking behaviors. Students take turns with partners or in small groups to read aloud, analyze, discuss, etc. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 116, 118, 124, 125, 128, 130, 134, 136, 145
f. Actively solicits another person’s comments or opinions.
Students are directed to discuss readings, interpretations, predictions, and so on. Such discussion implies soliciting and considering another’s comments and opinions. See examples: TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 128, 129, 131, 137, 146, 147, 152, 155, 158, 161, 164
g. Offers own opinion forcefully without domineering.
Students have many opportunities to share their opinions in the course of class discussion. See examples: TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 122, 134, 140, 146, 152 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 131, 135, 137, 165
Grade 8 Page 62 of 63
h. Responds appropriately to comments and questions.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 63, 64, 67, 68, 69, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 116, 117, 123, 124, 125, 130, 135, 136, 137
i. Volunteers contributions and responds when directly solicited by teacher or discussion leader.
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 59, 63, 64, 67, 68, 69, 73, 75, 80, 82, 83 TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 116, 117, 123, 124, 125, 130, 135, 136, 137
j. Gives reasons in support of opinions expressed.
Throughout SG:TE I/II. See examples: SGI/TE I: Unit 3: Predicting, pp. 122, 134, 140, 146, 152 SGI/TE II: Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 131, 135, 137, 165
k. Clarifies, illustrates, or expands on a response when asked to do so.
Throughout SG/TE I/II. See examples: SG I/TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 66, 72, 73, 78, 99 SG II/TE II: Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 66, 69, 78, 81, 87
l. Employs a group decision-making technique such as brainstorming or a problem-solving sequence (e.g., recognizes problem, defines problem, identifies possible solutions, selects optimal solution, implements solution, evaluates solution).
Throughout TE I/II. See examples: TE I: Unit 2: Questioning, pp. 73, 78, 94, 95, 97 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 11-13, 16-19, 22
m. Develops a plan of action or agenda for written and/or verbal follow-up.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
ELA8LSV2 The student listens to and views various forms of text and media in order to gather and share information, persuade others, and express and understand ideas. The student will select and critically analyze messages using rubrics as assessment tools.
When responding to visual and oral texts and media (e.g., television, radio, film productions, and electronic media), the student:
Grade 8 Page 63 of 63
a. Interprets and evaluates the various ways in which visual image makers (e.g., graphic artists, illustrators, news photographers) communicate information and affect impressions and opinions.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Analyzes oral communication by paraphrasing a speaker’s purpose and point of view, and asks relevant questions concerning the speaker’s content, delivery, and purpose.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
When delivering and responding to presentations, the student:
a. Gives oral presentations or dramatic interpretations for various purposes.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
b. Organizes information (e.g., message, vocabulary) to achieve particular purposes and to appeal to the background and interests of the audience.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
c. Shows appropriate changes in delivery (e.g., gestures, expression, tone, pace, visuals).
Examples: SG I: pp. 10, 37, 39-40, 42-43, 49, 85, 99, 104, 108 TE I: Unit 1, pp. 10, 37, 39-40, 42-43, 49; Unit 2, Questioning, pp. 85, 99, 104, 1008 SG II: pp. 6, 7, 10, 19, 28, 33, 34, 42, 43, 54, 105, 108, 111, 134, 137 TE II: Unit 4: Text Structure, pp. 6, 7, 10, 19, 28, 33, 34, 42, 43, 54; Unit 5: Visualizing, pp. 105, 108, 111; Unit 6: Inferencing, pp. 134, 137
d. Uses language for dramatic effect. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
e. Uses rubrics as assessment tools. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
f. Responds to oral communications with questions, challenges, or affirmations.
This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.
g. Uses multimedia for presentations. This standard falls outside the scope of these AMP Reading System titles.